Infiniti FX AT Manual

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION AT B
AT
E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and F
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5 Accurate Repair ...................................................... 46
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 51
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 52 G
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 53
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Check Before Engine Is Started ............................. 57
SIONER” .................................................................. 7 Check at Idle ........................................................... 57
H
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Cruise Test - Part 1 ................................................. 58
of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7 Cruise Test - Part 2 ................................................. 60
Precautions .............................................................. 8 Cruise Test - Part 3 ................................................. 61
Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 9 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ....... 62 I
PREPARATION ......................................................... 10 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases... 63
Special Service Tools ............................................. 10 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 64
Commercial Service Tools .......................................11 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ........... 89 J
A/T FLUID ................................................................. 12 CONSULT-II Function (A/T) .................................... 90
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 12 Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II .......... 102
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 13 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 104
K
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 15 Description ............................................................ 104
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 18 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 104
Cross-sectional View (2WD Models) ...................... 18 Possible Cause ..................................................... 104
Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)... 19 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 104 L
Cross-sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)... 20 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 105
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 21 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 106
TCM Function ......................................................... 32 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 107 M
CAN Communication .............................................. 33 Description ............................................................ 107
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 33 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 107
Line Pressure Control ............................................ 34 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 107
Shift Control ........................................................... 35 Possible Cause ..................................................... 107
Lock-up Control ...................................................... 37 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 107
Engine Brake Control ............................................. 38 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG .......................... 108
Control Valve .......................................................... 38 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 109
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 40 DTC P0700 TCM ......................................................111
Introduction ............................................................ 40 Description .............................................................111
OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 40 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................111
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 40 Possible Cause ......................................................111
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 40 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................111
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 43 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................111
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 44 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 112
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 44 Description ............................................................ 112
Fail-safe ................................................................. 44 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 112
Revision: 2006 December AT-1 2006 FX35/FX45

On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 112 Description ............................................................ 134
Possible Cause ..................................................... 112 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 134
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 112 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 134
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 113 Possible Cause ..................................................... 134
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 114 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 134
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR .... 116 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 135
Description ............................................................ 116 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 136
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 116 Component Inspection .......................................... 138
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 116 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 139
Possible Cause ..................................................... 116 Description ............................................................ 139
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 116 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 139
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 117 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 139
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REV- Possible Cause ..................................................... 139
OLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 118 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 139
Description ............................................................ 118 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 140
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 118 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK ................................. 141
Possible Cause ..................................................... 118 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 141
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 118 Possible Cause ..................................................... 141
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ......................... 120 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 141
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 121 Judgement of A/T Interlock ................................... 141
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 123 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 142
Description ............................................................ 123 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ............... 144
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 123 Description ............................................................ 144
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 123 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 144
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 145
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 125 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE . 146
Description ............................................................ 125 Description ............................................................ 146
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 125 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 146
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 125 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 146
Possible Cause ..................................................... 125 Possible Cause ..................................................... 146
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 125 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 146
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 126 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 147
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 127 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description ............................................................ 127 FUNCTION .............................................................. 148
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 129 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 149
Description ............................................................ 129 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE ... 150
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ....... 131 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 151
Description ............................................................ 131 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 131 FUNCTION .............................................................. 152
Possible Cause ..................................................... 131 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 152
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 131 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 152
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 132 Possible Cause ..................................................... 152
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 152
CIRCUIT .................................................................. 134 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 153

DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. 154 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 171
Description ........................................................... 154 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 171 A
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 154 Possible Cause ..................................................... 171
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 154 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 171
Possible Cause .................................................... 154 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 172 B
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 154 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 ............... 173
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 155 Description ............................................................ 173
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 173
FUNCTION .............................................................. 156 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 173 AT
Description ........................................................... 156 Possible Cause ..................................................... 173
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 156 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 173
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 156 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 174 D
Possible Cause .................................................... 156 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 ............... 175
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 156 Description ............................................................ 175
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 157 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 175 E
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 175
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 158 Possible Cause ..................................................... 175
Description ........................................................... 158 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 175
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 158 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 176 F
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 158 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 ............... 177
Possible Cause .................................................... 158 Description ............................................................ 177
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 158 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 177 G
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 159 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 177
DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH Possible Cause ..................................................... 177
SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION ............................. 160 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 177 H
Description ........................................................... 160 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 178
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 160 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT. 179
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 160 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 179
I
Possible Cause .................................................... 160 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 180
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 160 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 161 THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT ............................ 183
DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 183 J
VALVE ..................................................................... 162 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 183
Description ........................................................... 162 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................................... 184
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 162 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 184 K
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 162 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 184
Possible Cause .................................................... 162 A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT ....................................... 185
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 162 Description ............................................................ 185 L
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 163 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 185
DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 185
VALVE FUNCTION ................................................. 164 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 186
Description ........................................................... 164 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 186 M
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 164 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 189
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 164 Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” or “N” Position . 190
Possible Cause .................................................... 164 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ...... 191
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 164 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 192
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 165 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ......................... 193
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH .................. 166 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position. 196
Description ........................................................... 166 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position . 199
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 201
. 166 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 204
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 166 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 206
Possible Cause .................................................... 166 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 208
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 166 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 211
Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ......................... 167 A/T Does Not Lock-up .......................................... 213
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 169 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition .................. 215
Component Inspection ......................................... 170 Lock-up Is Not Released ...................................... 217
DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 ............... 171 Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle ................ 217
Description ........................................................... 171 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode .................. 219

A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ............ 219 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 274
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ............ 221 Components .......................................................... 274
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ........... 223 Oil Channel ........................................................... 288
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ............ 225 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake .... 227 Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 291
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 229 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 294
Control Device Removal and Installation .............. 229 Disassembly .......................................................... 294
Control Rod Removal and Installation .................. 230 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 312
Adjustment of A/T Position ................................... 231 Oil Pump ............................................................... 312
Checking of A/T Position ...................................... 231 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-way Clutch .................... 315
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 232 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ..... 317
Description ............................................................ 232 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 232 Reverse Clutch Hub .............................................. 323
Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 233 High and Low Reverse Clutch .............................. 329
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 234 Direct Clutch ......................................................... 332
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 236 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 335
Components ......................................................... 236 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 335
Removal and Installation ...................................... 237 Adjustment ............................................................ 349
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 239 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 352
Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 359
Sensor 2 ............................................................... 239 General Specifications .......................................... 359
Parking Components (2WD Models Only) ............ 251 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ...... 359
Rear Oil Seal ........................................................ 258 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases.360
Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Stall Speed ............................................................ 360
Only) ..................................................................... 259 Line Pressure ........................................................ 360
AIR BREATHER HOSE ........................................... 264 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 360
Removal and Installation ...................................... 264 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 361
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ................................ 266 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) ... 361
Removal and Installation (2WD Models) .............. 266 Reverse Brake ...................................................... 361
Removal and Installation (AWD Models) .............. 269 Total End Play ....................................................... 361

INDEX FOR DTC
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

A
Alphabetical Index NCS001AL
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CAN B
COMMUNICATION”. Refer to AT-104, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC
Items OBD-II Except OBD-II AT
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II GST(*1) CONSULT-II only “A/T”
A/T 1ST E/BRAKING — P1731 AT-144
D
ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC — P1841 AT-171
ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC — P1845 AT-175 E
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-141
F
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN (*2) P0744 AT-127
P0744
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P1710 AT-134
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-104 G
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 P1762 AT-154
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN (*2) P1764 AT-156
P1764
H
ENGINE SPEED SIG — P0725 AT-123
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 P1757 AT-150
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 (*2) P1759 AT-152 I
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 P1767 AT-158
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769(*2) P1769 AT-160 J
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 P1752 AT-146
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754(*2) P1754 AT-148
K
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 P0745 AT-129
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 P1772 AT-162
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT (*2) P1774 AT-164 L
P1774
MANU MODE SW/CIRC — P1815 AT-166
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 P0705 AT-112
M
STARTER RELAY/CIRC — P0615 AT-107
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 P0740 AT-125
TCM P0700 P0700 AT-111
TP SEN/CIRC A/T — P1705 AT-131
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P0717 P0717 AT-116
VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR — P1721 AT-139
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 P0720 AT-118
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index NCS001AM
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CAN
COMMUNICATION”. Refer to AT-104, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC
OBD-II Except OBD-II Items
Reference page
CONSULT-II (CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
GST(*1) only “A/T”
— P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC AT-107
P0700 P0700 TCM AT-111
P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-112
P0710 P1710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-134
P0717 P0717 TURBINE REV S/CIRC AT-116
P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT AT-118
— P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-123
P0740 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-125
P0744(*2) P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-127

P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-129
— P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-131
— P1721 VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR AT-139
P1730 P1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-141
— P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING AT-144
P1752 P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-146
P1754(*2) P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-148

P1757 P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-150
P1759(*2) P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-152

P1762 P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-154
P1764(*2) P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-156

P1767 P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-158
(*2) P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-160
P1769
P1772 P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-162
P1774(*2) P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-164

— P1815 MANU MODE SW/CIRC AT-166
— P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC AT-171
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-104
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NCS001AN
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: D
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. F
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine NCS001AO
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. H
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative termi-
nal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, sole- I
noid valves, etc. Will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, J
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. May cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. K
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc. L
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
M

PRECAUTIONS
Precautions NCS001AP
● Before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly har-

ness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect
the battery cable from the negative terminal. Because bat-
tery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
SEF289H
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Confirmation Procedure”.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed
in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
SEF217U
● Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
● Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
● After replacing the ATF, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
● Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to
prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
● Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
● Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could inter-
fere with the operation of the transmission.
● Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
● All parts should be carefully cleansed with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
● Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.
● It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
● The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
● Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
● Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
● Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
● After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
● When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque con-
verter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to AT-12, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions NCS001AQ
ATF COOLER SERVICE A

If ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to AT-15, "A/T B
Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . For radiator replacement, refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR" (for VQ35DE), CO-41, "RADI-
ATOR" (for VK45DE).
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS AT
● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table
on AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic D
result.
● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM mem-
ories. E
Always perform the procedure on AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-54, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (for VQ35DE) or EC-714,
F
"ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (for VK45DE).
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-72, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" . G

PREPARATION
PREPARATION PFP:00002
Special Service Tools NCS001AR
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1. ST25051001
( — )
Oil pressure gauge
2. ST25052000
( — )
Hose
3. ST25053000
( — )
Joint pipe
4. ST25054000 SCIA3695J
( — )
Adapter
5. ST25055000
( — )
Adapter
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure
(J-45674)
Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)
ZZA1227D
ST33400001 ● Installing rear oil seal (2WD models)

(J-26082) ● Installing oil pump housing oil seal
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
NT086
KV31102400 Installing reverse brake return spring retainer

(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
NT423
ST25850000 Removing oil pump assembly

(J-25721-A)
Sliding hammer
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
d: M12X1.75P
NT422

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools NCS001AS
A
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

B
AT
PBIC0190E
Drift Installing manual shaft oil seals D

a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
NT083
F
Drift Installing rear oil seal (AWD models)
a: 64 mm (2.52 in) dia.
SCIA5338E H

A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID PFP:KLE40
Changing A/T Fluid NCS001AT
1. Warm up ATF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Loosen the level gauge bolt.
4. Drain ATF from drain plug and refill with new ATF. Always refill
same volume with drained ATF.
● To replace the ATF, pour in new ATF at the A/T fluid charging
pipe with the engine idling, at the same time drain the old ATF
from the radiator cooler hose return side.
● When the color of the ATF coming out is almost same as the
color of the new ATF, the replacement is complete. The
amount of new ATF to use should be 30 to 50% of the stipu-
lated amount.
SCIA4896E
ATF: Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF

Fluid capacity: 10.3 (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 lmp qt)
CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other ATF.
● Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/
T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
● When filling ATF, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
● Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
Drain plug:
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
5. Run engine at idle speed for 5 minutes.

6. Check A/T fluid level and condition. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If ATF is still dirty, repeat step 2.
through 5.
7. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge into A/T fluid charging pipe.
8. Tighten the level gauge bolt.
Level gauge bolt:
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)

A/T FLUID
Checking A/T Fluid NCS001AU
A
1. Warm up engine.
2. Check for A/T fluid leakage.
3. Loosen the level gauge bolt.
B
4. Before driving, A/T fluid level can be checked at A/T fluid tem-
peratures of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD” range on A/
T fluid level gauge as follows.
AT
a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear posi-
tion. Leave selector lever in P position.
D
c. Check A/T fluid level with engine idling.
d. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and wipe clean with lint-free
paper.
E
CAUTION: SCIA7120E
When wiping away the A/T fluid level gauge, always use
lint-free paper, not a cloth one.
F
e. Re-insert A/T fluid level gauge into A/T fluid charging pipe as far as it will go.
CAUTION:
To check A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the end of the A/T
fluid charging pipe, with the A/T fluid level gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions. G
f. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and note reading. If reading is at low side of range, add ATF to the A/T fluid
charging pipe.
H
CAUTION:
Do not overfill.
5. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
I
6. Make the A/T fluid temperature approximately 65°C (149°F).
NOTE:
A/T fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown in figure. Therefore, be certain to
perform operation while checking data with CONSULT-II. J
SLIA0016E
a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.

b. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
c. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP 1”.
7. Recheck A/T fluid level at A/T fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using “HOT” range on A/
T fluid level gauge.

A/T FLUID
CAUTION:
● When wiping away the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth one.
● To check A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge
until the cap contacts the end of the A/T fluid charging
pipe, with the A/T fluid level gauge reversed from the nor-
mal attachment conditions as shown.
8. Check A/T fluid condition.
● If ATF is very dark or smells burned, check operation of A/T.
Flush cooling system after repair of A/T.
● If ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent
and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-14,
"RADIATOR" (for VQ35DE) or CO-41, "RADIATOR" (for SCIA2899E
VK45DE) and AT-15, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .

9. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging
pipe.
10. Tighten level gauge bolt.
Level gauge bolt:
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
SCIA4896E

A/T FLUID
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning NCS001AV
A
Whenever an automatic transmission is replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be
inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of ATF. In either case, mal- B
function of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as ATF enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. AT
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. Position an oil pan under the A/T's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Identify the inlet and outlet A/T fluid cooler hoses. D
3. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses
from the steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE: E
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any ATF that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the F
oil pan.
G
SCIA3830E
H
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION: I
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate J
ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
● Do not breath vapors or spray mist. K

SCIA3831E
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis-
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until ATF flows out of the cooler
inlet hose for 5 seconds. L
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose. M
2
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm (70 to 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any
remaining ATF.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the A/T
fluid cooler steel lines to the transmission.
12. Remove the banjo bolts. SCIA3832E
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the trans-
mission by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (70 to 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler
side back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining ATF.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
17. Perform AT-16, "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .

A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE

NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.

SCIA3831E
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis-
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until ATF flows out of the cooler
inlet hose for 5 seconds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
SCIA3833E
6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (70 to 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining ATF into
the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform AT-17, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCE-
DURE" .
SCIA3834E

A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris. A
a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and B
the procedure is ended.
AT
SCIA2967E
D
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm

(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in E
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T fluid
cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
ended. Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR" and CO-17, "RADIATOR
(ALUMINUM TYPE)" (for VQ35DE), CO-41, "RADIATOR" and F
CO-45, "RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)" (for VK45DE).
SCIA7031E
A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION H

After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:31036
Cross-sectional View (2WD Models) NCS001AW
SCIA5262E
1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump
13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Rear extension 20. Output shaft

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD) NCS001AX
AT
I
SCIA5263E

J
K
19. Adapter case 20. Output shaft

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD) NCS001J9
SCIA5268E

19. Adapter case 20. Output shaft

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism NCS001AY
A
The A/T uses compact triple planetary gear systems to improve power transmission efficiency, simplify con-
struction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation. B
CONSTRUCTION
AT
H
PCIA0002J
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
I
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
J
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
K
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE

Name of the Part Abbreviation Function L
Front brake (1) FR/B Fastens the front sun gear (11).
Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal
Input clutch (2) I/C
gear (13).
M
Direct clutch (3) D/C Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16).
High and low reverse clutch (4) HLR/C Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16).
Reverse brake (5) R/B Fastens the rear carrier (15).
Forward brake (6) Fwd/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Low coast brake (7) LC/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear
1st one-way clutch (8) 1st OWC
(17) but fastens it for reverse rotation.
Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it
Forward one-way clutch (9) Fwd OWC
for reverse rotation.
Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens
3rd one-way clutch (10) 3rd OWC
it for reverse rotation.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
SCIA6962E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position A
Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not trans-
mitted to the output shaft.
B
“P” Position
● The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque
from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
AT
● The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
D
PCIA0003J

J
K
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft L

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D1 ” Position
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
● The 1st one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear.
● The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
● During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine
brake is not activated.
SCIA1512E


A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“M1” Position
● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. A
● High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
B
● The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
● During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.
AT
K
SCIA1513E

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake L
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier M

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D2 ” Position
● The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine
brake is not activated.
SCIA1514E


A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“M2” Position
B
● The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
● During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.
AT
K
SCIA1515E

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake L
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier M

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D3 ” and “M3” Positions

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
SCIA1516E


A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. A
● The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
B
● The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three
planetary gears rotate forward as one unit.
AT
SCIA1517E
K
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch L
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier M

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
SCIA4984E


A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“R” Position
● The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier.
B
AT
J
SCIA1519E

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake K
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier L
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl M

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TCM Function NCS001AZ
The function of the TCM is to:

● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS
PNP switch Input clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal Shift control Direct clutch solenoid valve
Closed throttle position signal Line pressure control Front brake solenoid valve
Wide open throttle position signal Lock-up control High and low reverse clutch
Engine speed signal Engine brake control solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor Þ Timing control Þ Low coast brake solenoid valve
Revolution sensor Fail-safe control Torque converter clutch solenoid
Vehicle speed signal Self-diagnosis valve
Manual mode switch signal CONSULT-II communication line Line pressure solenoid valve
Stop lamp switch signal Duet-EA control A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Turbine revolution sensor CAN system Starter relay
ATF pressure switch Back-up lamp relay
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
SCIA5325E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication NCS001B0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other B
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. For details, refer to LAN-32,
AT
"CAN Communication Unit" .
Input/Output Signal of TCM NCS001B1
Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-

D
Shift Lock-up
Control item pressure speed brake function nostics
control control
control control control (*3) function
Accelerator pedal position signal (*5) X X X X X X X E

Vehicle speed sensor A/T
X X X X X X X
(revolution sensor)
F
Vehicle speed sensor MTR(*1) (*5) X
Closed throttle position signal(*5) X (*2) X X X X (*4)
Wide open throttle position signal(*5) X X (*4) G

Turbine revolution sensor 1 X X X X X
Input Turbine revolution sensor 2
X X X X X H
(for 4th speed only)
Engine speed signals(*5) X X X X X X X
Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X X X (*4) I

A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 X X X X X X
Operation signal(*5) X X X
ASCD or J
ICC Overdrive cancel
X
signal(*5)
Direct clutch solenoid (ATF pres- K
X X X X
sure switch 5)
Input clutch solenoid (ATF pressure
X X X X
switch 3)
L
High and low reverse clutch sole-
X X X X
noid (ATF pressure switch 6)
Out- Front brake solenoid (ATF pressure M
X X X X
put switch 1)
Low coast brake solenoid (ATF
X X X X X
pressure switch 2)
Line pressure solenoid X X X X X X X
TCC solenoid X X X
Self-diagnostics table(*6) X
Starter relay X X
*1: Spare for vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: Input by CAN communications
*6: Output by CAN communications

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Line Pressure Control NCS001B2
● When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid.
● This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the
pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the
driving state.
PCIA0007E
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC

PATTERN
● The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.
● In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current valve and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.
PCIA0008E
Back-up Control (Engine Brake)

When the select operation is performed during driving and the trans-
mission is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the
vehicle speed.
PCIA0009E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
During Shift Change

The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set. A
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic is
set according to engine speed, during engine brake operation. B
AT
PCIA0010E
At Low Fluid Temperature H

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic. I
K
PCIA0011E
Shift Control NCS001B3

L
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac- M
teristic is attained.
PCIA0012E
SHIFT CHANGE
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Shift Change System Diagram
PCIA0013E
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
BLIPPING CONTROL
This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution
according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down.
● “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions.
– When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression at “D” position.
– When downshifting under the manual mode.
● TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the
select lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by accelerator pedal depression.
● Revolution control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.
● TCM synchronizes engine revolution according to the revolution control demand signal.
Shift Change System Diagram
SCIA6483E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Lock-up Control NCS001B4
A
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases B
the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up Operation Condition Table
AT
selector lever D position M5 position M4 position M3 position
Gear position 5 4 5 4 3
Lock-up × – × × × D
Slip lock-up × × – – –
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL E

Lock-up Control System Diagram
PCIA0014E
Lock-up Released I
In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. J
Lock-up Applied
In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque K
converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL L
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
M
Half-clutched State
The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to gradually increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the half-
clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Engine Brake Control NCS001B5
● The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse
drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling.
Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and
the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally.
SCIA1520E
● The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls
the coupling and releasing of the low coast brake.
The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force.
Control Valve NCS001B6
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE

Name Function
In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive,
Torque converter regulator valve the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pres-
sure).
Pressure regulator valve
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
Pressure regulator plug
the driving state.
Pressure regulator sleeve
When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Front brake control valve (front brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th gears,
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston
Accumulator control valve
and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve A
for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve B
for shift change control.
Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve.
When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Low coast brake reducing valve
(low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake.
N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected.
Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4th gear and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity.
When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the opti-
High and low reverse clutch control valve mum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low
reverse clutch. (In 1st, 3rd, 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.)

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Name Function
A
When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Input clutch control valve (input clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4th and 5th gears, adjusts
the clutch pressure.)
When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure B
Direct clutch control valve (direct clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears,
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
TCC control valve
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation
AT
TCC control plug
transiently, lock-up smoothly.
TCC control sleeve
Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system D
Torque converter lubrication valve
oil passage.
Cool bypass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it.
Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit. E
N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected.
Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which
Manual valve
the line pressure is not sent drain. F
FUNCTION OF ATF PRESSURE SWITCH
Name Function
G
Detects any malfunction in the front brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 1 (FR/B)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any H
ATF pressure switch 2 (LC/B)
malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the input clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 3 (I/C)
I
Detects any malfunction in the direct clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
ATF pressure switch 5 (D/C)
Detects any malfunction in the high and low reverse clutch hydraulic pressure. When it J
ATF pressure switch 6 (HLR/C)
detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
Introduction NCS001B7
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,
refer to AT-92, "Display Items List" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System NCS001B8
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in rela-
tion to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II NCS001B9
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd trip
The “Trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) NCS001BA
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recom-
mended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven
after the last detection of a DTC.
BCIA0030E

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
A
AT
SAT015K
D
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
G
SAT016K
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data H

The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, I
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-119, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (for VQ35DE) or EC-780, "CONSULT-II Function J
(ENGINE)" (for VK45DE).
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
K
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data. L
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1 M
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
● If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-55, "Emission-Related Diagnostic Information" (for VQ35DE) or EC-
715, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (for VK45DE).
● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)

● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)

● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
● If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SCIA5671E

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 A
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-102, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diag- B
nosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-130, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" (for VQ35DE) or EC-792, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (for VK45DE). AT
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel. D
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-102, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS- E
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diag-
nosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No tools)”. Refer to EC-67, "How to Erase DTC"
F
(for VQ35DE) or EC-727, "How to Erase DTC" (for VK45DE).
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) NCS001BB
DESCRIPTION G
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check. H
● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-672, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" (for
VQ35DE) or EC-1360, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" I
(for VK45DE).
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
J
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
DTC Inspection Priority Chart NCS001BC
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000 CAN
COMMUNICATION. Refer to AT-104 .
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 U1000 CAN communication line
2 Except above
Fail-safe NCS001BD
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a an error in
a main electronic control input/output signal circuit.
In fail-safe mode, even if the selector lever is “D” or “M” mode, the transmission is fixed in 2nd, 4th or 5th
(depending on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”.
Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the
brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe
mode. If this happens, switch OFF the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it ON again to return to the
normal shift pattern. Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to the
“WORK FLOW” (Refer to AT-47 ).
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to mark driving possible.
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Signals are input from two systems - from vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) installed on the trans-
mission and from combination meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in one of the
systems. And if vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) has unusual cases, 5th gear and manual mode
are prohibited.
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according
to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow systems,
the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible.
Throttle Position Sensor
If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according
to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow systems,
the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based on input indi-
cating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order to make driving
possible.
PNP Switch
In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched OFF, the
starter relay is switched OFF (starter starting is disabled), the back-up lamp relay switched OFF (back-up lamp
is OFF) and the position is fixed to the “D” position to make driving possible.
Starter Relay
The starter relay is switched OFF. (Starter starting is disabled.)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Interlock
● If there is an A/T interlock judgment malfunction, the A/T is fixed in 2nd gear to make driving possible. A
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2nd gear, a turbine revolution sensor malfunction is displayed,
but this is not a turbine revolution sensor malfunction. B
● When the coupling pattern below is detected, the fail-safe action corresponding to the pattern is per-
formed.
A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE AT
●: NG X: OK
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe func-
ATF pressure switch output D
tion
Fail-safe
Gear position SW6
SW3 SW5 SW1 SW2 function
(HLR/ I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U
(I/C) (D/C) (FR/B) (LC/B)
C) E
Held in
3rd – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
A/T inter- F
Held in
lock cou- 4th – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
pling pattern
Held in
5th X X – X ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear G
A/T 1st Engine Braking
When there is an A/T first gear engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is switched
H
OFF to avoid the engine brake operation.
Line Pressure Solenoid
The solenoid is switched OFF and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make driving I
possible.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
The solenoid is switched OFF to release the lock-up. J
Low Coast Brake Solenoid

When a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs, in order to make driving possible, if the solenoid is ON, K
the transmission is held in 2nd gear; if the solenoid is OFF, the A/T is held in 4th gear. (Engine brake is not
applied in 1st and 2nd gear.)
Input Clutch Solenoid L
If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either ON or OFF, the A/T is held in 4th gear
to make driving possible.
Direct Clutch Solenoid M
Front Brake Solenoid
If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid ON, in order to make driving possible, the A/
T is held in 5th gear; if the solenoid is OFF, 4th gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid
Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2
The control is the same as if there were no turbine revolution sensors, 5th gear and manual mode are prohib-
ited.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair NCS001BE
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position
sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc-
tion, etc.
SAT631IB
It is much more difficult to diagnose a error that occurs intermittently

rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused by poor
electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful check-
ing of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good
parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the AT-47, "WORK FLOW" .
SAT632I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a

customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such errors, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” as
shown on the example (Refer to AT-48 ) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
SEF234G

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. A
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp-
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-48 ) and “DIAGNOSTIC B
WORKSHEET” (Refer to AT-48 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
Work Flow Chart
AT
SCIA7037E
*1. AT-48 *2. AT-48 *3. AT-44

*4. AT-53 *5. AT-53, AT-54 *6. AT-56
*7. AT-90 *8. AT-40 *9. AT-44
*10. AT-104 *11. AT-177 *12. AT-186
*13. AT-64 *14. AT-41 *15. AT-104
EC-55 (for VQ35DE) or EC-715
*16. AT-177 *17.
(for VK45DE)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information from Customer
KEY POINTS
● WHAT..... Vehicle and A/T model
● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
● WHERE..... Road conditions
● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name MR/MS Model and Year VIN
Trans. Model Engine Mileage
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency ❏ Continuous ❏ Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position ❏ Particular position)
❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th)
❏ No down-shift (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lock-up malfunction
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position)
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
❏ No pattern select
❏ Others
( )
A/T CHECK indicator lamp ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit
Diagnostic Worksheet Chart

1 ❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-44
❏ A/T fluid inspection AT-53
2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.)

❏ State
❏ Amount
❏ Stall test and line pressure test AT-53, AT-
54
❏ Stall test
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ 1st one-way clutch
❏ Front brake ❏ 3rd one-way clutch
3 ❏ High and low reverse clutch ❏ Engine
❏ Low coast brake ❏ Line pressure low
❏ Forward brake ❏ Except for input clutch and direct
❏ Reverse brake clutch, clutches and brakes OK
❏ Forward one-way clutch
❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-56
A
Check before engine is started AT-57
❏ The A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-189 .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-92 , AT-102 .
B
❏ AT-104, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
❏ AT-107, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-111, "DTC P0700 TCM"
❏ AT-112, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . AT
❏ AT-116, "DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-118, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .
❏ AT-123, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
❏ AT-125, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . D
❏ AT-127, "DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)" .
❏ AT-129, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-131, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-134, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . E
❏ AT-139, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
4-1. ❏ AT-141, "DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK" .
❏ AT-144, "DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING" .
F
❏ AT-146, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-148, "DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-150, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-152, "DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" . G
❏ AT-154, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-156, "DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-158, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-160, "DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE H
4
FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-162, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-164, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-166, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . I
❏ AT-171, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" .
J
Check at Idle AT-57

❏ AT-190, "Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” or “N” Position" .
K
❏ AT-191, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed"
4-2. ❏ AT-192, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" .
❏ AT-193, "Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)" .
❏ AT-196, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position" . L
❏ AT-199, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position" .
Cruise Test AT-58
Part 1 M
❏ AT-201, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
❏ AT-204, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" .
4-3. ❏ AT-206, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .
❏ AT-213, "A/T Does Not Lock-up"
❏ AT-215, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" .
❏ AT-217, "Lock-up Is Not Released" .
❏ AT-217, "Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Part 2 AT-60
❏ AT-201, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
Part 3 AT-61
❏ AT-219, "Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode" .
❏ AT-219, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear" .
❏ AT-221, "A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear" .
❏ AT-223, "A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear" .
❏ AT-225, "A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear" .
❏ AT-227, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake" .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-92 , AT-102 .
❏ AT-104, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
❏ AT-107, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-111, "DTC P0700 TCM"
❏ AT-112, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
❏ AT-116, "DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-118, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .
❏ AT-123, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
❏ AT-125, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
4 4-3.
❏ AT-127, "DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)" .
❏ AT-129, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-131, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .
❏ AT-134, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-139, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
❏ AT-141, "DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK" .
❏ AT-144, "DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING" .
❏ AT-146, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-148, "DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-150, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-152, "DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-154, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-156, "DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-158, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-160, "DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-162, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-164, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-166, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
5 ❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6 ❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-56
❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunctioning AT-64
7 parts. See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection pro-
cedures.)
AT-95, AT-
8 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM.
102

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location NCS001BF
AT
SCIA7752E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram NCS001BG
TCWM0495E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis NCS001BH
A/T CHECK A
A/T Fluid Leakage and A/T Fluid Level Check
Check for A/T fluid leakage and check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
B
A/T Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the A/T fluid condition.
Fluid condition Conceivable Cause Required Operation
AT
Replace the ATF and check the A/T
Varnished (viscous Clutch, brake main unit and the vehicle for mal-
varnish state) scorched functions (wire harnesses, cooler D
pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the ATF and check for
Water in the fluid
cloudy places where water is getting in. E
Large amount of Unusual wear of
Replace the ATF and check for
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
improper operation of the A/T.
in A/T SAT638A
F
STALL TEST
Stall Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. G
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Check the
amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary. H
J
SAT647B
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. K
4. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
L
SCIA7463E
5. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test.
Stall speed
VQ35DE engine : 2,650 - 2,950 rpm
SAT514G
VK45DE engine : 2,260 - 2,560 rpm
7. Move the selector lever to the “N” position.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
8. Cool down the ATF.

CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
Judgement of Stall Test
Selector lever position
Expected problem location
“D”, “M” “R”
● Forward brake
● Forward one-way clutch
H O
● 1st one-way clutch
Stall speed ● 3rd one-way clutch
O H ● Reverse brake
L L ● Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H ● Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position

Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4th or 5th gear Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5th gear Front brake slippage
LINE PRESSURE TEST

Line Pressure Test Port
SCIA2187E
Line Pressure Test Procedure

1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the ATF reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F), then inspect the amount of ATF and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The A/T fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driving.
3. Remove the front propeller shaft from vehicle (with AWD models). Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installa-
tion" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. After warming up remove the oil pressure detection plug and

install the oil pressure gauge [ST2505S001(J-34301-C)]. A
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O-
ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug. B
AT
SCIA5309E
D
5. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
G
SCIA7463E
6. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and H
the stall speed.
CAUTION:
● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement. I
● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed,
refer to AT-53, "STALL TEST" .
7. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure J
detection plug and tighten to the specified torque.
:7.3 N·m (0.74 kg-m, 65 in-lb) SAT493G
K
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse the O-ring.
● Apply ATF to the O-ring. L
Line Pressure
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) M
Engine speed
“R” position “D”, “M” positions
At idle speed 425 - 465 (4.3 - 4.7, 62 - 67) 379 - 428 (3.9 - 4.4, 55 - 62)
At stall speed 1,605 - 1,950 (16.4 - 19.9, 233 - 283) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.4 - 15.3, 190 - 218)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Judgement of Line Pressure Test

Judgement Possible cause
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example
Low for all positions ● Oil pump wear
(“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”,
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
“M”)
● Oil strainer Þ oil pump Þ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
● Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
Idle speed cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment func-
tion.
For example
High ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction

● ATF temperature sensor malfunction
● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in OFF state, filter clog, cut line)
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.
For example
Line pressure does ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
not rise higher than ● TCM breakdown
the line pressure for
idle. ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in ON state)
● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
Stall speed Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pres-
sure adjustment function.
The pressure rises, For example
but does not enter ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
the standard posi-
● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
tion.
● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
ROAD TEST
Description
● The road test checks overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes.
● The road test is carried out in the following three stages.
1. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-57 .
2. Check at idle. Refer to AT-57 .
3. Cruise test
● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-58 , AT-60 , AT-61 .
● Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items.
● Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are com-
plete.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Check Before Engine Is Started NCS001BI
1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP A
1. Park vehicle on level surface.

2. Move selector lever to “P” position. B
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
AT
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Perform self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" D
. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-102, "Diagnostic Procedure with-
out CONSULT-II" .
3. Go to AT-57, "Check at Idle" .
E
NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-189, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .
Check at Idle NCS001BJ
1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE F
1. Park vehicle on level surface.

2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position. G
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Start engine.
Does the engine start? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-190, "Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” or “N” Position" .
I
2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) J
2. Move selector lever to “D”, “M” or “R” position.
3. Start engine.
Does the engine start in either position? K
YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-190, "Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” or “N” Position" .
NO >> GO TO 3.
L
3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Move selector lever to “P” position.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
3. Disengage the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.
5. Engage the parking brake.
When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move?
YES >> Enter a check mark at AT-191, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed" on the AT-48,
"DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test.
NO >> GO TO 4.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS

1. Start engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Disengage the parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
YES >> Enter a check mark at AT-192, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC
WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK

1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “D” position.
When the transmission is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
YES >> Enter a check mark at AT-193, "Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC
NO >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS

1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds.
Does the vehicle creep backward?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-196, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position" on the AT-48,
7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS

Inspect whether the vehicle creep forward when the A/T is put into the “D” position.
Does the vehicle creep forward in the “D” position?
YES >> Go to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part
3" .
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-199, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position" on the AT-48,
Cruise Test - Part 1 NCS001BK
1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1

1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and ATF.
Appropriate temperature for the ATF: 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Move selector lever to “P” position.
4. Start the engine.
5. Move selector lever to “D” position.
6. Press the accelerator pedal about half-way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear positions. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Starts from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-201, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 A
Press down the accelerator pedal about half-way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appro-
priate speed. Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" .
With CONSULT-II B
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" .
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? AT
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-204, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC
WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test. D
3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press down the accelerator pedal about half-way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appro- E
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR F
MODE" .
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 4. G
H
priate speed. Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" . I
With CONSULT-II
MODE" . J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-208, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC K
5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5 L
With CONSULT-II M
MODE" .
YES >> GO TO 6.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. CHECK LOCK-UP
When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U. Refer to AT-63, "Vehicle Speed at
Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases" .
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for “A/T”. Refer to AT-90, "CONSULT-II REFER-
ENCE VALUE" .
Does it lock-up?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-213, "A/T Does Not Lock-up" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.
7. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD

Check hold lock-up.
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for “A/T”. Refer to AT-90, "CONSULT-II REFER-
ENCE VALUE" .
Does it maintain lock-up status?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-215, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOS-
8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE

Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Refer to AT-90, "CONSULT-II REFERENCE
VALUE" .
Does lock-up cancel?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-217, "Lock-up Is Not Released" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET" , then continue the road test.
9. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5 → D4
Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position and engine speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
When the A/T shift-down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-217, "Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle" on the AT-48, "DIAG-
NOSTIC WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test. Go to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
Cruise Test - Part 2 NCS001BL
1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1

1. Move selector lever into “D” position.
2. Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does it start from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-201, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" on the AT-48, "DIAGNOS-

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 A
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and check whether or not the A/T shifts up (D1 → D2) at the cor-
rect speed. Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" .
With CONSULT-II B
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
YES >> GO TO 3. AT
D
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and check whether or not the A/T shifts up (D2 → D3) at the cor-
rect speed. Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs" . E
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-95, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? F
YES >> GO TO 4.
WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test. G
4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE

H
When the A/T changes speed D3 → D4, return the accelerator pedal.
With CONSULT-II
I
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
2. Go to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . J
WORKSHEET" , then continue the road test. Go to AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 3" .
Cruise Test - Part 3 NCS001BM
K
1. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION
Move to manual mode from “D” position. L
Does it switch to manual mode?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Continue road test and add check mark to AT-219, "Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode" on the M
AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
2. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
During manual mode driving, is downshift from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed?
With CONSULT-II
Is downshifting correctly performed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th →
3rd, 3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the AT-48, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" , then continue the road
test.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Check engine brake.
Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position?
2. Perform self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-102,
"Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II" .
NO >> Enter a check mark at AT-227, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake" on the AT-48,
"DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" , then continue trouble diagnosis.
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs NCS001BN
2WD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
68 - 72 106 - 114 164 - 174 235 - 245 231 - 241 154 - 164 89 - 97 38 - 42
Full throttle
(42 - 45) (66 - 71) (102 - 108) (146 - 152) (144 - 150) (96 - 102) (55 - 60) (23 - 27)
54 - 58 83 - 91 126 - 136 158 - 168 103 - 113 74 - 84 34 - 42 11 - 15
Half throttle
(34 - 36) (52 - 57) (78 - 85) (98 - 104) (64 - 70) (46 - 52) (21 - 26) (7 - 9)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
AWD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Throttle position
62 - 66 96 - 104 149 - 159 213 - 223 209 - 219 121 - 131 81 - 89 39 - 43
Full throttle
(39 - 41) (60 - 65) (93 - 99) (132 - 139) (130 - 136) (75 - 81) (50 - 55) (24 - 27)
49 - 53 75 - 83 114 - 124 141 - 151 94 - 104 66 - 76 31 - 39 11 - 15
Half throttle
(30 - 33) (47 - 52) (71 - 77) (88 - 94) (58 - 65) (41 - 47) (19 - 24) (7 - 9)
Engine model VK45DE

Throttle position
59 - 63 95 - 103 147 - 157 219 - 229 215 - 225 130 - 140 82 - 90 35 - 39
Full throttle
(37 - 39) (59 - 64) (92 - 98) (137 - 143) (134 - 141) (81 - 88) (51 - 56) (22 - 24)
48 - 52 77 - 85 121 - 131 153 - 163 121 - 131 67 - 77 39 - 47 9 - 13
Half throttle
(30 - 33) (48 - 53) (76 - 82) (96 - 102) (76 - 82) (42 - 48) (24 - 29) (6 - 8)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases NCS001BO
2WD MODELS A
Engine model VQ35DE
Throttle position B
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 63 - 73 (39 - 45) 40 - 48 (25 - 30)
Half throttle 196 - 204 (122 - 127) 153 - 161 (95 - 100) AT
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal: OFF)
D
AWD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) E
Throttle position
Closed throttle 59 - 67 (37 - 42) 56 - 64 (35 - 40)
F
Half throttle 178 - 186 (111 - 116) 139 - 147 (86 - 91)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. G
Engine model VK45DE

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) H
Throttle position
Closed throttle 66 - 74 (41 - 46) 53 - 61 (33 - 38)
Half throttle 191 - 199 (119 - 124) 147 - 155 (92 - 97) I
J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Chart NCS001BP
● The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Check in order from Item 1.
● Overhaul and check inside the A/T only if A/T fluid condition is NG. Refer to AT-53, "A/T Fluid Condition
Check" .
Reference
No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
EC-82 (for
VQ35DE)
1. Engine idle speed or EC-742
(for
VK45DE)
2. Engine speed signal AT-123
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-131
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-231
ON vehicle
Large shock. (“N” → 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-134
“D” position)
AT-171,
1 Refer to AT-193, 6. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-150
"Large Shock (“N” to
“D” Position)" . 7. CAN communication line AT-104
8. A/T fluid level and state AT-53
9. Line pressure test AT-54
10. Control valve with TCM AT-239
Shift 11. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
Shock to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
OFF vehicle "Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, "Cross-sec- AT-294
tional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)" or AT-20, "Cross-
sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)" )
AT-175,
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-154
4. CAN communication line AT-104
Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-123
2 when changing D1 →
D2 or M1 → M2 . 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-116
AT-118,
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-139
OFF vehicle 10. Direct clutch AT-332

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-177,
noid valve AT-158
AT
3 when changing D2 →
D3 or M2 → M3 . 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-116
AT-118, D
AT-139
9. Control valve with TCM AT-239 E
OFF vehicle 10. High and low reverse clutch AT-329
F
AT-173,
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve
AT-146
G
4 Shift when changing D3 →
6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-116 H
Shock D4 or M3 → M4 .
AT-118,
AT-139
8. A/T fluid level and state AT-53 I
OFF vehicle 10. Input clutch AT-317
J
AT-171, K
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-150
ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-123 L
Shock is too large
5 when changing D4 → 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-116
D5 or M4 → M5 .
AT-118,
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR M
AT-139
10. Front brake (brake band) AT-274
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch AT-317

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-116
Shock is too large for AT-118,
downshift when accel- 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
6 AT-139
erator pedal is
pressed. 7. A/T fluid level and state AT-53
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch AT-329
12. Direct clutch AT-332
Shift
Shock Shock is too large for AT-118,
7 upshift when acceler- AT-139
ator pedal is released. 7. A/T fluid level and state AT-53
OFF vehicle
5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-116
Shock is too large for ON vehicle
8 AT-118,
lock-up. 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-139
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125
OFF vehicle 10. Torque converter AT-294

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line AT-104
Shift Shock is too large
9 5. Control valve with TCM AT-239 AT
Shock during engine brake.
OFF vehicle D
1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53 E
AT-118,
AT-139
Gear does not change
from D1 → D2 or from AT-175, F
M1 → M2 . ON vehicle AT-154
10
Refer to AT-204, "A/T
Does Not Shift: D1 →
D2 " . 5. CAN communication line AT-104 G
H
AT-118,
AT-139
Gear does not change I
from D2 → D3 or from 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-177,
11 M2 → M3 . ON vehicle noid valve AT-158
No Up Refer to AT-206, "A/T
Shift Does Not Shift: D2 → J
D3 " . 5. CAN communication line AT-104
OFF vehicle 7. High and low reverse clutch AT-329 K
AT-118,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR L
AT-139
Gear does not change AT-173,

from D3 → D4 or from AT-146
M3 → M4 . ON vehicle M
12 AT-171,
Refer to AT-208, "A/T 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-150
D4 " . 5. Line pressure test AT-54

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-171,
AT-150
Gear does not change
from D4 → D5 or from ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-175,
No Up M4 → M5 . AT-154
13
Shift Refer to AT-211, "A/T 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-116
D5" . 6. Line pressure test AT-54
OFF vehicle
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-171,
AT-150
ON vehicle
In “D” or “M” position, AT-175,
14 does not downshift to AT-154
4th gear.
No Down OFF vehicle
Shift
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-173,
AT-146
In “D” or “M” position, ON vehicle
15 does not downshift to AT-171,
3rd gear. AT-150

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
AT-118,
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR B
AT-139
In “D” or “M” position, ON vehicle noid valve AT-158
16 does not downshift to
2nd gear. 4. CAN communication line AT-104
AT
D
No Down OFF vehicle 7. High and low reverse clutch AT-329
Shift 1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53
AT-118, E
AT-139
AT-175,
In “D” or “M” position, ON vehicle 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-154 F
17 does not downshift to
1st gear. 4. CAN communication line AT-104
G
1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53 H
AT-118,
AT-139
ON vehicle 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-154 I

J
7. 3rd one-way clutch AT-315
Slips/Will When “D” or “M” posi- 8. 1st one-way clutch AT-323 K

18 Not tion, remains in 1st 9. Gear system AT-274
Engage gear.
10. Reverse brake AT-294
11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is L
impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
OFF vehicle AT-18, "Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, AT-294
"Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)" or AT-
M
20, "Cross-sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)" )
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
"Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, "Cross-sec- AT-294

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-118,
AT-139
ON vehicle 3. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-162

When “D” or “M” posi- 6. Control valve with TCM AT-239
19 tion, remains in 2nd
gear. 7. 3rd one-way clutch AT-315
8. Gear system AT-274
OFF vehicle 10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible
Slips/Will 1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53

Not AT-118,
Engage 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-139
ON vehicle
When “D” or “M” posi- 7. Gear system AT-274
tion, remains in 3rd
20 8. High and low reverse clutch AT-329
gear.
9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
AT-18, "Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, AT-294
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-173,
AT-146
AT-175, AT
AT-154
ON vehicle 5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-177,
noid valve AT-158 D
When “D” or “M” posi-
21 tion, remains in 4th 6. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-162
gear. 7. Front brake solenoid valve AT-150
E
10. Control valve with TCM AT-239 F
Slips/Will 11. Input clutch AT-317
Not 12. Gear system AT-274
Engage OFF vehicle G
1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53 H
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-171, I
ON vehicle 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve
AT-150
When “D” or “M” posi- 4. Line pressure test AT-54

22 tion, remains in 5th 5. CAN communication line AT-104 J
gear.
K
OFF vehicle
10. High and low reverse clutch AT-329 L

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-54
6. Torque converter AT-294
7. Oil pump assembly AT-312
Vehicle cannot be
started from D1 . 9. 1st one-way clutch AT-323
23 Refer to AT-201,
"Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" . 11. Reverse brake AT-294
OFF vehicle 12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
Slips/Will
Not
Engage 1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53
Does not lock-up.
24 Refer to AT-213, "A/T 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125
Does Not Lock-up" .
OFF vehicle
Does not hold lock-up
condition.
25 Refer to AT-215, "A/T 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125
Does Not Hold Lock-
up Condition" .
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
Lock-up is not
released.
26 Refer to AT-217, 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125 AT
"Lock-up Is Not
Released" .
D
OFF vehicle
1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53 E
AT-118,
AT-139
Slips/Will
AT-175, F
Not ON vehicle 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-154
Engage
5. Line pressure test AT-54 G
No shock at all or the 6. Control valve with TCM AT-239
clutch slips when
27 vehicle changes 7. Torque converter AT-294
H
speed D1 → D2 or 8. Oil pump assembly AT-312
M1 → M2 .
10. Gear system AT-274 I
to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18, J
K

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-118,
AT-139
ON vehicle noid valve AT-158
No shock at all or the
clutch slips when
28 vehicle changes 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-315
speed D2 → D3 or
M2 → M3 .
OFF vehicle impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
Slips/Will 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible

Not to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
Engage "Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, "Cross-sec- AT-294
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-173,
AT-146
ON vehicle
AT-171,
AT-150
clutch slips when
29 vehicle changes 6. Line pressure test AT-54
speed D3 → D4 or
M3 → M4 .
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-171,
AT-150
ON vehicle
AT-175, AT
AT-154
clutch slips when
D
30 vehicle changes 6. Line pressure test AT-54
speed D4 → D5 or
M4 → M5 .
8. Torque converter AT-294 E
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch AT-317 F
Slips/Will 13. High and low reverse clutch AT-329
Not G
Engage 1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53
AT-118,
AT-139 H
AT-171,
AT-150
ON vehicle
AT-175, I
AT-154
When you press the
accelerator pedal and 5. CAN communication line AT-104
shift speed D5 → D4
31 6. Line pressure test AT-54 J
or M5 → M4 the
engine idles or the A/ 7. Control valve with TCM AT-239
T slips.
K
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system AT-274 L
M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-173,
AT-146
ON vehicle
AT-171,
AT-150
When pressing the
accelerator pedal and 8. Torque converter AT-294
shifting speed D4 → 9. Oil pump assembly AT-312
32
D3 or M4 → M3 the
engine idles or the A/ 10. 3rd one-way clutch AT-315
T slips. 11. Gear system AT-274
Slips/Will to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,
Not "Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, "Cross-sec- AT-294
Engage tional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)" or AT-20, "Cross-
AT-118,
AT-139
noid valve AT-158
ON vehicle
AT-175,
AT-154
When pressing the
accelerator pedal and
shifting speed D3 → 7. Control valve with TCM AT-239
33
D2 or M3 → M2 the
engine idles or the A/
T slips. 9. Oil pump assembly AT-312

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
AT-118,
AT-139
AT-175,
ON vehicle 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve
AT-154
AT
D
When pressing the 8. Oil pump assembly AT-312
accelerator pedal and
9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-315 E
shifting speed D2 →
34
D1 or M2 → M1 the 10. 1st one-way clutch AT-323
engine idles or the A/
T slips. 11. Gear system AT-274
F
G
14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible H
Slips/Will tional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)" or AT-20, "Cross-
Not sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)" )
I
Engage
2. Line pressure test AT-54 J
5. PNP switch AT-112 K
L
With selector lever in
35 “D” position, accelera- 10. 1st one-way clutch AT-323 M
tion is extremely poor. 11. Gear system AT-274

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle noid valve AT-158
With selector lever in 5. CAN communication line AT-104
36 “R” position, accelera-
6. PNP switch AT-112
tion is extremely poor.
OFF vehicle 10. Output shaft AT-294
Slips/Will ON vehicle 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-131

Not 4. CAN communication line AT-104
Engage
While starting off by
9. 1st one-way clutch AT-323
accelerating in 1st,
37
engine races or slip- 10. Gear system AT-274
page occurs.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
AT-175, AT
AT-154
While accelerating in 7. Torque converter AT-294 D
38 2nd, engine races or
slippage occurs. 8. Oil pump assembly AT-312
E
12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible F
sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)" ) G
Slips/Will
Not H
Engage 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-131
5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch sole- AT-177, I
noid valve AT-158
7. Torque converter AT-294 J
While accelerating in
39 3rd, engine races or K
slippage occurs. 10. Gear system AT-274
12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is L
20, "Cross-sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)" ) M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-173,
AT-146
40 4th, engine races or 6. Control valve with TCM AT-239
slippage occurs. 7. Torque converter AT-294
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will
Not AT-171,
Engage AT-150
41 5th, engine races or 6. Control valve with TCM AT-239
slippage occurs. 7. Torque converter AT-294
OFF vehicle
42 Slips at lock-up. 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
AT-175,
ON vehicle AT-154
AT
7. Control linkage adjustment AT-231 D
No creep at all.
Refer to AT-196, 9. Torque converter AT-294
E
"Vehicle Does Not 10. Oil pump assembly AT-312
Creep Backward in
43 11. 1st one-way clutch AT-323
“R” Position" , AT-199,
"Vehicle Does Not 12. Gear system AT-274 F
Creep Forward in “D”
Position" 13. Reverse brake AT-294
Slips/Will 14. Direct clutch AT-332

Not 15. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
G
OFF vehicle
Engage impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
"Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)" or AT- H
"Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, "Cross-sec- AT-294 I
1. A/T fluid level and state AT-53 J
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-112
K
Vehicle cannot run in 4. Control linkage adjustment AT-231
44
all positions. 5. Control valve with TCM AT-239
6. Oil pump assembly AT-312 L
OFF vehicle 7. Gear system AT-274
8. Output shaft AT-294
M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
8. 1st one-way clutch AT-323
With selector lever in
45 “D” position, driving is 9. Gear system AT-274
not possible. 10. Reverse brake AT-294
Slips/Will AT-18, "Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, AT-294
Not "Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)" or AT-
Engage 20, "Cross-sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)" )
With selector lever in 4. Control linkage adjustment AT-231
46 “R” position, driving is
not possible. 5. Control valve with TCM AT-239
OFF vehicle 7. Output shaft AT-294
Does not change M5 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-231

→ M4. ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-166
Does Not
47 Refer to AT-219, "A/T
Change 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-171
Does Not Shift: 5th
Gear → 4th Gear" . 6. CAN communication line AT-104
OFF vehicle 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-294

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
B
Does not change M4 4. Manual mode switch AT-166
ON vehicle
→ M3.
AT-171, AT
48 Refer to AT-221, "A/T 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3
AT-173
Does Not Shift: 4th
Gear → 3rd Gear" . 6. CAN communication line AT-104
7. Control valve with TCM AT-239 D
OFF vehicle
E
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-231 F
Does not change M3 ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-166
→ M2. 5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-177
49 Refer to AT-223, "A/T G
Does Not Shift: 3rd 6. CAN communication line AT-104
Gear → 2nd Gear" . 7. Control valve with TCM AT-239
Does Not
Change 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-294 H
1. PNP switch AT-112 I
J
Does not change M2 ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-166
→ M1. 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-175
50 Refer to AT-225, "A/T
Does Not Shift: 2nd 6. CAN communication line AT-104 K
Gear → 1st Gear" . 7. Control valve with TCM AT-239
L
Cannot be changed to 1. Manual mode switch AT-166 M
manual mode.
51 2. Turbine revolution sensor AT-116
Refer to AT-219, ON vehicle
"Cannot Be Changed
to Manual Mode" .
AT-118,
AT-139
Shift point is high in
52 Others ON vehicle
“D” position. 3. CAN communication line AT-104
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-134

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
AT-118,
AT-139
Shift point is low in “D” 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-131
53 ON vehicle
position.
AT-118,
ON vehicle AT-139
Judder occurs during
54
lock-up. 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-131
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125
Others
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “R”
55 5. Torque converter AT-294
position.
OFF vehicle 7. Gear system AT-274
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “N”
56 4. Control valve with TCM AT-239
position.
OFF vehicle 6. Oil pump assembly AT-312

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
ON vehicle B
5. Torque converter AT-294 AT
Strange noise in “D”
57 6. Oil pump assembly AT-312
position.
OFF vehicle D
tional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)" or AT-20, "Cross- E
2. A/T fluid level and state AT-53 F
Vehicle does not
decelerate by engine ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-166
brake. G
5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-175
58 Refer to AT-227,
"Vehicle Does Not 6. CAN communication line AT-104
Decelerate by Engine 7. Control valve with TCM AT-239 H
Brake" .
Others OFF vehicle 9. High and low reverse clutch AT-329
10. Direct clutch AT-332 I
J
Engine brake does ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-166

59
not work M5 → M4. 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-171 K
L
OFF vehicle 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-294
2. A/T fluid level and state AT-53 M
4. Manual mode switch AT-166
ON vehicle
Engine brake does AT-171,
60 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3
not work M4 → M3. AT-173
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-166
Engine brake does 5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-177

61
not work M3 → M2. 6. CAN communication line AT-104
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-166
Engine brake does 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-175

62
not work M2 → M1. 6. CAN communication line AT-104
Others 10. Direct clutch AT-332

ON vehicle
5. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-154
63 Maximum speed low. 10. Gear system AT-274


TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page A
EC-82 (for
VQ35DE)
1. Engine idle speed or EC-742 B
(for
Extremely large ON vehicle
64 VK45DE)
creep.
AT
3. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-175
With selector lever in 1. PNP switch AT-112 D
“P” position, vehicle ON vehicle
does not enter parking
condition or, with
selector lever in E
AT-
another position, park-
65 251(2WD
ing condition is not
models) or
cancelled. OFF vehicle 3. Parking pawl components
Refer to AT-191, "In
AT-294 F
(AWD
“P” Position, Vehicle
models)
Moves When Pushed"
. G
ON vehicle H
Vehicle runs with A/T AT-
66 Others I
in “P” position. 251(2WD
models) or
5. Parking pawl components
OFF vehicle AT-294
(AWD J
models)
1. PNP switch AT-112 K
ON vehicle
L
6. Gear system AT-274 M
Vehicle runs with A/T 7. Direct clutch AT-332
in “N” position.
67 Refer to AT-192, "In 8. Reverse brake AT-294
“N” Position, Vehicle 9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is
Moves" . impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to
OFF vehicle AT-18, "Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)" , AT-19, AT-294
10. Low coast brake (Parts behind drum support is impossi-
ble to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-18,

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Reference
page
Engine does not start PG-3, SC-
1. Ignition switch and starter
in “N” or “P” position. 8
Refer to AT-190,
68 ON vehicle 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-231
"Engine Cannot Be
Started in “P” or “N”
Position" .
PG-3, SC-
1. Ignition switch and starter
Engine starts in posi- 8
69 tions other than “N” or ON vehicle
“P”.
ON vehicle
70 Engine stall. 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125
Others 2. Engine speed signal AT-123
Engine stalls when ON vehicle
71 selector lever shifted 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125
“N” → “D”, “R”.
AT-175,
AT-154
AT-171,
AT-150
Engine speed does
ON vehicle
not return to idle. 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-131
72 Refer to AT-217,
AT-118,
"Engine Speed Does 5. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR
AT-139
Not Return to Idle" .
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values NCS001BQ
A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT A
AT
D
SCIA1658E
TCM INSPECTION TABLE

Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. E
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
1 LG
Power supply
Always Battery voltage
F
(Memory back-up)
Power supply
2 LG Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up) G
3 L CAN-H – –
K-line (CONSULT-
4 PU The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II. –
II signal) H
5 B Ground – –
– Battery voltage I
6 Y Power supply
– 0V J
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V

Back-up lamp K
7 OR
relay Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage
8 P CAN-L – –
L
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. Battery voltage
9 GY Starter relay
Selector lever in other positions. 0V
M
10 B Ground – –

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (A/T) NCS001BR
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test models shown following.
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function Reference page
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. AT-92
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECU can be read. AT-95
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. AT-99
monitor
Performed by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system
Function test —
is “OK” or “NG”.
DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. AT-99
ECU part number TCM part number can be read. —
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE

NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole-
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Man-
ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
– Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
– Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
– Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
VHCL/S SE-A/T Approximately
During driving matches the speed-
VHCL/S SE-MTR ometer reading.
Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8.0/8
Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSD THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF
Depressed brake pedal. ON
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF
Closely matches the
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
tachometer reading.
Approximately
TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON) matches the engine
speed.
ATF TEMP SE 1 3.3 - 2.7 - 0.9 V
0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F)
ATF TEMP SE 2 3.3 - 2.5 - 0.7 V
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
Lock-up is active 0.4 - 0.6 A
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.) A
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A
B
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0.6 - 0.8 A AT
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL D
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. ON
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other positions. OFF E
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. N/P
SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in “R” position. R
Selector lever in “D” position. D F
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . OFF
G
Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON
ATF PRES SW 1
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . OFF
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON H
ATF PRES SW 2
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON
ATF PRES SW 3 I
Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . OFF
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON
ATF PRES SW 5
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . OFF J
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged Refer to AT-22 . OFF
K
Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF L
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Selector lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER M
Selector lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
GEAR During driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE

Refer toGI-38, "CONSULT-II Start Procedure" .
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE
After performing AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , place check marks for results on the AT-48,
"DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items.
Operation Procedure
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing opera-
tion.
BCIA0031E
Display Items List

X: Applicable, —: Not applicable
TCM self- OBD-II
diagnosis (DTC)
MIL indica-
Items (CONSULT-II tor lamp(*1) , Reference
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
screen terms) “ENGINE” page
CONSULT-
II with CON-
SULT-II or
GST
CAN COMM CIR-
● When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications U1000 U1000 AT-104
CUIT
● If this signal is ON other than in “P” or “N” position, this is judged
STARTER RELAY/ to be a malfunction.
P0615 — AT-107
CIRC (And if it is OFF in “P” or “N” position, this too is judged to be a
malfunction.)
TCM ● TCM is malfunctioning P0700 P0700 AT-111
● PNP switch 1-4 signals input with impossible pattern
PNP SW/CIRC ● “P” position is detected from “N” position without any other posi- P0705 P0705 AT-112
tion being detected in between.
● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
TURBINE REV S/
● TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine P0717 P0717 AT-116
CIRC
revolution sensor 2.
● Signal from vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) not
input due to cut line or the like
VEH SPD SEN/CIR
● Unexpected signal input during running P0720 P0720 AT-118
AT
● After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal input from
vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts moving
ENGINE SPEED ● TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from the
P0725 — AT-123
SIG ECM.
TCC SOLENOID/ ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or
P0740 P0740 AT-125
CIRC the like
● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
A/T TCC S/V
FNCTN ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip P0744 P0744(*2) AT-127
rotation.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TCM self- OBD-II

diagnosis (DTC) A
MIL indica-
screen terms) “ENGINE” page B
CONSULT-
II with CON-
SULT-II or
GST
AT
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or
L/PRESS SOL/ the like
P0745 P0745 AT-129
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor
value. D
● TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position sig-
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 — AT-131
nals (input by CAN communication) from ECM.
E
ATF TEMP SEN/ ● During running, the AT fluid temperature sensor signal voltage is
P1710 P0710 AT-134
CIRC excessively high or low
● Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sensor MTR not
VEH SPD SE/ input due to cut line or the like P1721 — AT-139
F
CIR·MTR
● Unexpected signal input during running
● Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF pressure
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-141 G
switch states are monitored and comparative judgement made.
● Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is monitored and
A/T 1ST E/BRAK-
if a pattern is detected having engine braking 1st gear other than P1731 — AT-144
ING H
in the M1 position, a malfunction is detected.
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunc-
I/C SOLENOID/ tion, cut line, short, or the like
P1752 P1752 AT-146
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor I
value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is J
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during
I/C SOLENOID shift change)
FNCTN
P1754 P1754(*2) AT-148
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of K
ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing accelerator
pedal. (Other than during shift change)
L
FR/B SOLENOID/ tion, cut line, short, or the like
P1757 P1757 AT-150
value.
M
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is
FR/B SOLENOID shift change)
FNCT
P1759 P1759(*2) AT-152
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or
D/C SOLENOID/ the like
P1762 P1762 AT-154
value.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TCM self- OBD-II

diagnosis (DTC)
MIL indica-
screen terms) “ENGINE” page
CONSULT-
II with CON-
SULT-II or
GST
D/C SOLENOID shift change)
FNCTN
P1764 P1764(*2) AT-156
tion, cut line, short, or the like
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 P1767 AT-158
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor
value.
HLR/C SOL shift change)
FNCTN
P1769 P1769(*2) AT-160
LC/B SOLENOID/ ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunc-
P1772 P1772 AT-162
CIRC tion, cut line, short, or the like
● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate
the solenoid valve.
LC/B SOLENOID
FNCT ● Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from monitor P1774 P1774(*2) AT-164
value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio is
irregular.
MANU MODE SW/ ● When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, a mal-
P1815 — AT-166
CIRC function is detected.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 1/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is
P1841 — AT-171
CIRC irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during
shift change)
P1843 — AT-173
shift change)
P1845 — AT-175
shift change)
P1846 — AT-177
shift change)
NO DTC IS
DETECTED FUR-
THER TESTING ● No NG item has been detected. X X —
MAY BE
REQUIRED
*1: Refer to EC-68, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (for VQ35DE engine) or EC-729, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (for
VK45DE engine.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results
1. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE”
screen.
B
AT
BCIA0031E
2. Touch ”ERASE”. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.) E
PCIA0061E
H
DATA MONITOR MODE

Operation Procedure I
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
NOTE:
When malfunctions detected, CONSULT-II performs “REAL- J
TIME DIAGNOSIS”. Also, any malfunction detected while in this
mode will be displayed at real time.
K
L
BCIA0031E
Display Items List

X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option M
Select Monitor Item
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h) X X Revolution sensor
VHCL/S SE-MTR (km/h) X —
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — Accelerator pedal position signal
Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by

the TCM
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value used
for control is displayed.
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X —

Signal input with CAN communications
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X —

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Select Monitor Item

SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU
BRAKE SW (ON/OFF) X — Stop lamp switch
Gear position recognized by the TCM updated

GEAR — X
after gear-shifting
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
TURBINE REV (rpm) X X
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
GEAR RATIO — X
Difference between engine speed and torque

TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
converter input shaft speed
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — —
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — —
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X —
ATF TEMP SE 2 (V) X —
ATF TEMP 1 (°C) — X
ATF TEMP 2 (°C) — X
BATTERY VOLT (V) X —
ATF PRES SW 1 (ON/OFF) X X (for FR/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 2 (ON/OFF) X X (for LC/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 3 (ON/OFF) X X (for I/C solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 5 (ON/OFF) X X (for D/C solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 6 (ON/OFF) X X (for HLR/C solenoid)
PNP SW 1 (ON/OFF) X —
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
Selector lever position is recognized by the

TCM.
SLCT LVR POSI — X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value used
for control is displayed.
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X —
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X — Not mounted but displayed.
HOLD SW (ON/OFF) X —
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Select Monitor Item

A
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU B
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) — —
Not mounted but displayed.
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) — —
AT
ASCD·OD CUT (ON/OFF) — —
ASCD·CRUISE (ON/OFF) — —
D
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) — —
ACC OD CUT (ON/OFF) — —

ICC (intelligent cruise control) E
ACC SIGNAL (ON/OFF) — —
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) — —
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) — — F

TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF) — —
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X G

LINE PRES SOL (A) — X
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X H

FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X

I
HLR/C SOL (A) — X
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — — LC/B solenoid

J
TCC SOL MON (A) — —
L/P SOL MON (A) — —

K
I/C SL MON (A) — —
FR/B SOL MON (A) — —
D/C SOL MON (A) — — L
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — —
ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — — LC/B solenoid M

P POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
R POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
N POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
D POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
4TH POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
3RD POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
2ND POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
1ST POSI IND (ON/OFF) — —
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — —
POWER M LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — —

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Select Monitor Item

SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — — Not mounted but displayed
BACK-UP LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — —
PNP SW3 MON (ON/OFF) — —
C/V CLB ID1 — —
C/V CLB ID2 — —
C/V CLB ID3 — —
UNIT CLB ID1 — —
TRGT GR RATIO — —
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa) — —
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa) — —
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa) — —
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa) — —
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa) — —
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa) — —
SHIFT PATTERN — —
DRV CST JUDGE — —
START RLY MON — —
NEXT GR POSI — —
SHIFT MODE — —
MANU GR POSI — —
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
Displays the value measured by the voltage

Voltage (V) — —
probe.
Frequency (Hz) — —
DUTY-HI (high) (%) — —

The value measured by the pulse probe is dis-
DUTY-LOW (low) (%) — —
played.
PLS WIDTH-HI (ms) — —
PLS WIDTH-LOW (ms) — —

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR MODE

Operation Procedure A
Touch “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE”
screen. Refer to LAN-16, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor" .
B
AT
D
BCIA0031E
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE E

Operation Procedure
1. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT” on “SELECT DIAG MODE”
screen. F
BCIA0031E
I
2. Touch select item menu.
L
SCIA0512E
3. Touch “START”.
M
SCIA5159E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. Perform driving test according to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”

in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
SCIA5160E
● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen

changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
SCIA5161E
5. Stop vehicle.
SCIA5164E
● If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exit. Go

to “Diagnostic Procedure”
SCIA5162E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with

instructions displayed. A
7. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
8. CONSULT-II procedure is ended.
B
AT
SCIA5163E
D
● If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exit.
Go to “Diagnostic Procedure”
E
G
SCIA5162E
Display Items List H

DTC work support item Description Check item
I/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —

I
FR/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
D/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
HLR/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — J
LC/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —

Following items for “TCC solenoid function (lock-up) ” can be con- ● TCC solenoid valve K
firmed. ● Hydraulic control circuit
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed
or not)
L
● Self-diagnosis results (OK or NG)
*: Do not use, but displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II NCS001BS
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)

Refer to EC-130, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (for VQ35DE) or EC-792, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" (for VK45DE).
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Refer to EC-68, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (for VQ35DE) or EC-729, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)" (for VK45DE).
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Description
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds. As a method for locating the
suspect circuit, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction location is output
and the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF at least twice, then leave it in the OFF position.
3. Wait 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to AT-189, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .
2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE
2. Keep pressing shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal ON.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal ON.)
7. Wait 3 seconds.
8. Move the selector lever to the manual shift gate side. (Manual mode signal ON.)
9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal OFF.)
10. Move the selector lever to “D” position. (Manual mode signal OFF.)
11. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal ON.)
12. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal OFF.)
13. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE

Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp. Refer to AT-103, "Judgement Self-diagnosis Code" .
If the system does not go into self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-112, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" , AT-183, "CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT" , AT-184, "BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT" .
>> DIAGNOSIS END

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Judgement Self-diagnosis Code

If there is a malfunction, the lamp lights up for the time corresponding to the suspect circuit. A
No. Malfunctioning item No. Malfunctioning item
1 Revolution sensor AT-118 10 A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-134
B
2 Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-154 , AT-156 11 Turbine revolution sensor AT-116
3 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-125 , AT-127 12 A/T interlock AT-141
4 Line pressure solenoid valve AT-129 13 A/T 1st engine braking AT-144 AT
5 Input clutch solenoid valve AT-146 , AT-148 14 Start signal AT-107
6 Front brake solenoid valve AT-150 , AT-152 15 Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-131
D
7 Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-162 , AT-164 16 Engine speed signal AT-123
8 High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-158 , AT-160 17 CAN communication line AT-104
9 PNP switch AT-112 E
SCIA5767E
Erase Self-diagnosis
● In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
● However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after performing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II.

DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
Description NCS001BT
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001BU
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or 17th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
Possible Cause NCS001BV
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001BW
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-106, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0031E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN NCS001BX
AT
TCWM0496E

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
color
3 L CAN-H – –
8 P CAN-L – –
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001BY
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
Is any malfunction of the “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated?
YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, go to LAN section. Refer
to LAN-3, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
NO >> INSPECTION END
PCIA0061E

DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT PFP:25230

A
Description NCS001BZ
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.

B
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001C0
Item name Condition Display value

Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. ON AT
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other positions. OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001C1 D

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 14th judgement flicker
without CONSULT-II is detected when starter relay is switched ON other than at “P” or “N” position. (Or E
when switched OFF at “P” or “N” position).
Possible Cause NCS001C2
F
● Harness or connectors
(Starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
● Starter relay circuit G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001C3
CAUTION:
H
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I
WITH CONSULT-II
J
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER
RELAY” ON/OFF. K
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
L
M
BCIA0031E

Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG NCS001C4
TCWM0247E

Wire A
color
9 GY Starter relay B
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001C5
1. CHECK STARTER RELAY AT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) D
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER
RELAY” ON/OFF. E

Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. ON F
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in other positions. OFF
Without CONSULT-II PCIA0056E

G
2. Check voltage between the IPDM E/R connector and ground.
H
Item Connector Terminal Shift position Voltage (Approx.)
Starter “N” and “P” Battery voltage

E9 53 Ground
relay “R” and “D” 0V I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2. J
SCIA2103E
K
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR AND IPDM E/R CONNEC-
TOR
L
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector and M
IPDM E/R connector.
Item Connector Terminal Continuity
A/T assembly harness con-
F44 9
nector Yes
IPDM E/R connector E9 53
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG SCIA5439E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2" .
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector ter-
minal and TCM connector terminal.
F44 9
nector Yes
TCM connector F502 8
OK or NG SCIA5440E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● Starter relay, Refer to SC-8, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
● IPDM E/R, Refer to PG-17, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE
ROOM)" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
perature Sensor 2" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-107, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0700 TCM
DTC P0700 TCM PFP:31036

A
Description NCS001C6
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T. B
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001C7
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. AT

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0700 TCM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM is malfunctioning.
Possible Cause NCS001C8
D
TCM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001C9
NOTE: E
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. F
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA G
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
H
4. Start engine.
5. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
I
BCIA0031E
J
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001CA
K
1. CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II L
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
M
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform AT-111, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
Is the “P0700 TCM” displayed again?
YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH PFP:32006
Description NCS001CB
● The PNP switch includes a transmission range switch.

● The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001CC

Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. N/P
SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in “R” position. R
Selector lever in “D” position. D
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001CD

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0705 PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 9th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the PNP switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 based on the
gear position.
– When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” position.
Possible Cause NCS001CE
(PNP switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
● PNP switches 1, 2, 3 and 4
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001CF
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
4. Start engine.
5. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
ACCCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8
BCIA0031E
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW NCS001CG
AT
TCWM0248E

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001CH
1. CHECK PNP SW CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Check if correct selector lever position (N/P, R or D) is displayed
as selector lever is moved into each position.

Selector lever in N and P positions. N/P
SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in R position. R
Selector lever in D position. D PCIA0034E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-179, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

● A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS A
Sensor 2" .
2. Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector. B
3. Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector
terminals and TCM connector terminals.
AT
Park/neutral position switch
F505 1
connector Yes
D
F505 2
connector Yes E
SCIA5457E
F505 3
connector Yes F
F505 5
connector Yes G
H
OK or NG
I
5. CHECK DTC J

OK or NG K
NG >> GO TO 2.
L

DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR PFP:31935
Description NCS001RN
The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of
the automatic transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001E2

TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001E3

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0717 TURBINE REV S/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 11th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2.
Possible Cause NCS001E4
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Turbine revolution sensor 1 and/or 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001E5
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “VHCL/S SE-AT”,
“ENGINE SPEED”, “ACCELE POSI”, “SLCT LVR POSI” and
“GEAR”.
4. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED: 1,500 rpm or more
ACCELE POSI: More than 0.5/8 BCIA0031E
SLCTLVR POSI: “D” position

GEAR (Turbine revolution sensor 1): “4” or “5” position
GEAR (Turbine revolution sensor 2): All positions
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
WITH GST

DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001E6
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Vehicle start and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. AT
Item name Condition Display value (rpm)
TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON)

Approximately matches D
the engine speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. E
PCIA0041E
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F

CUIT" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
H
Check the following. I
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem- J
4. CHECK DTC K

OK or NG L
NG >> GO TO 2.
M

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:32702
Description NCS001CI
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal.
The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001CJ

VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001CK

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT” with CONSULT-II or 1st judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions.
– After ignition switch is turned ON, irregular signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle
starts moving.
Possible Cause NCS001CL
● Revolution sensor
● Vehicle speed sensor MTR
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001CM
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T”
value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-121, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “VHCL/S SE-AT”, BCIA0031E
“ACCELE POSI”, “ENGINE SPEED” and “SLCT LVR POSI”.
6. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If the check result is NG, go to AT-121, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more


Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving A
WITH GST B
AT

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T NCS001CN
TCWM0249E

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001CO
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
3. Start engine. AT
4. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
D
Approximately matches
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
the speedometer reading. E
SCIA2148E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2. F

G
CUIT" .
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I

● A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K

4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS
Sensor 2" .
2. Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector.
F505 8
connector Yes
F505 9
connector Yes
SCIA5458E
F505 10
connector Yes
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE THE REVOLUTION SENSOR AND CHECK DTC

1. Replace the revolution sensor. Refer to AT-259, "Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only)"
(2WD models) or AT-294, "Disassembly" , AT-274, "Components" (AWD models).
2. Perform AT-118, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
NG >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
6. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL PFP:24825

A
Description NCS001CP
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM with CAN communication.
B
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001CQ

ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading. AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001CR
● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. D

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG” with CONSULT-II or 16th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine cranking
or running. E
Possible Cause NCS001CS
F
(ECM to TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001CT
CAUTION: G
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF and H
WITH CONSULT-II I
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, J
“ACCELE POSI” and “SLCT LVR POSI”.
4. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 K
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 L
BCIA0031E
M

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001CU
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-102, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure without CONSULT-II" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-104, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change
corresponding to wide-open throttle position signal.
Closely matches the
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
tachometer reading.
PCIA0041E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit. Refer to EC-649, "IGNITION SIGNAL" (for VQ35DE) or EC-
1328, "IGNITION SIGNAL" (for VK45DE)
3. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description NCS001CV
● The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D5 , M3, M4 and M5 by the TCM
in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle B
position sensor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
● Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1.0/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should AT
not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001CW
D
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
TCC SOLENOID
Lock-up is active 0.4 - 0.6 A E
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001CX
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. F

● Diagnostic trouble code “P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 3rd judgement flicker with-
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. G
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause NCS001CY
H
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) I
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001CZ
CAUTION: J
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K
WITH CONSULT-II L
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “VHCL/S SE-A/T”,
M
ACCELE POSI: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased BCIA0031E
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions

required for this test.
5. If DTC is detected go to AT-126, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001D0
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
TCC SOLENOID
OK or NG SCIA4793E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) PFP:31940

A
Description NCS001D1
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5th gear position or the torque converter clutch
does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or B
shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,
etc.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001D2 AT
TCC SOLENOID D
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001D3

E
● Diagnostic trouble code “P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or 3rd judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. F
– When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation.
Possible Cause NCS001D4
G
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
H
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001D5
I
CAUTION:
J
NOTE:
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and Select “TCC SOL FNCTN CHECK” of “DTC
L
WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch
“START”.
2. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain
the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned M
to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after
“TESTING” shows.)
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
TCC SOLENOID: 0.4 - 0.6 A
[Reference speed: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50 BCIA0031E
MPH)]
– Make sure “GEAR” shows “5”.
– For shift schedule, refer to AT-360, "Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases" .
– If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In
case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC”.
3. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to AT-128, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-360, "Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases" .
WITH GST
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001D6

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
4. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving.
TCC SOLENOID
OK or NG SCIA4793E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description NCS001D7
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal sent from the TCM. B
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001D8
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001D9

D
● Diagnostic trouble code “P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 4th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. E
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
F
Possible Cause NCS001DA
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) G
● Line pressure solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001DB
H
NOTE:
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I
WITH CONSULT-II
J
with CONSULT-II.
K
4. Engine start and wait at least 5 seconds.
5. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-130, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
BCIA0031E
M
WITH GST

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001DC

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Read out the value of “LINE PRES SOL” while driving.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. SCIA4793E
NG >> GO TO 2.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR PFP:22620

A
Description NCS001DN
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN com- B
munication.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001DO
AT
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8.0/8 D
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001DP
● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T” with CONSULT-II or 15th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input
by CAN communication) from ECM. F
Possible Cause NCS001DQ
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001DR
NOTE: H
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for J
4. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. K
BCIA0031E

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001DS

NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

With CONSULT-II
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “ACCELE
POSI”.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8.0/8
PCIA0070E

II. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK DTC WITH ECM

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-119, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)"
(for VQ35DE) or EC-780, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)"
(for VK45DE).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to EC-119, "CON-
SULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (for VQ35DE) or EC-780,
"CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (for VK45DE).
BCIA0030E
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-104,
"DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT A

CUIT" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 6.
AT
D
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem- E

DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PFP:31940
Description NCS001DT
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001DU
Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.)

ATF TEMP SE 1 3.3 - 2.7 - 0.9 V
0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176)
ATF TEMP SE 2 3.3 - 2.5 - 0.7 V
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001DV

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1710 (A/T), P0710 (ENGINE) ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 10th
judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage
from the sensor.
Possible Cause NCS001DW
● A/T fluid temperature sensors 1 and/or 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001DX
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “VHCL/S SE-A/T”,
minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
BCIA0031E
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS NCS001DY
AT
TCWM0251E

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001DZ
1. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1”.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 3.3 - 2.7 - 0.9 V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3. PCIA0039E
2. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 2”.
ATF TEMP SE 2 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 3.3 - 2.5 - 0.7 V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
3. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1

Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 1. Refer to AT-138, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem-
4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS
1. Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector.
F505 6
connector Yes
F505 7
connector Yes
SCIA5461E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 A

Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-138, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. B
NG >> Replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-247, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
AT
1. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector and TCM connector.
D
2. Check continuity between A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 con-
nector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Item Connector Terminal Continuity E
A/T fluid temperature sen-
F507 1
sor 2 connector Yes
TCM connector F502 3 F
A/T fluid temperature sen-
F507 2
sor 2 connector Yes
TCM connector F502 5 G
SCIA5462E

OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT I
1. Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-179, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
CIRCUIT" . J
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Tem- K
8. CHECK DTC L

OK or NG M
NG >> GO TO 1.

Component Inspection NCS001E0
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1

Sensor 2" .
2. Check resistance between terminals.
Temperature Resistance
Name Connector Terminal
°C (°F) (Approx.)
0 (32) 15 kΩ
A/T fluid temperature
F505 6-7 20 (68) 6.5 kΩ
sensor 1
80 (176) 0.9 kΩ
3. If NG, replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239,

"Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
SCIA5463E
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2

1. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-247, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" .
2. Check resistance between terminals.
Temperature Resistance
Name Connector Terminal
°C (°F) (Approx.)
0 (32) 10 kΩ
A/T fluid temperature
F507 1-2 20 (68) 4 kΩ
sensor 2
80 (176) 0.5 kΩ
3. If NG, replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-

247, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" . SCIA5271E

DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR PFP:24814

A
Description NCS001E7
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication
line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM B
will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001E8
AT
VHCL/S SE-MTR During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001E9

D

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1721 VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does E
not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination
meter.
Possible Cause NCS001EA F
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001EB
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) J
3. Touch “START”. K
ACCELE POSI: 1.0/8 or less L
VHCL/S SE-MTR: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more
BCIA0031E M

DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001EC

Is malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the result?
NO >> GO TO 2.

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-MTR”.
Approximately matches the
VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving
speedometer reading.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. SCIA2148E
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METERS

Check combination meters. Refer to DI-16, "Trouble Diagnosis" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG

DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK
DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK PFP:00000

A
Description NCS001ED
● Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.

B
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001EE

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1730 A/T INTERLOCK” with CONSULT-II or 12th judgement flicker without AT
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and
switch.
● TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each ATF pressure switch when gear is D
steady.
Possible Cause NCS001EF
● Harness or connectors E
(Solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 2 F
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001EG
NOTE: G
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” I
with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine. J
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position K
BCIA0031E
L
WITH GST
Judgement of A/T Interlock NCS001EH M
When A/T Interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2nd gear, and should be set
in a condition in which it can travel.
When one of the following fastening patterns is detected, the fail-safe function in correspondence with the indi-
vidual pattern should be performed.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2nd gear, a turbine revolution sensor malfunction is displayed, but
this is not a turbine revolution sensor malfunction.

A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE

●: NG, X: OK
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe func-
ATF pressure switch output
tion
Fail-safe
Gear position SW6
SW3 SW5 SW1 SW2 function
(HLR/ I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U
(I/C) (D/C) (FR/B) (LC/B)
C)
Held in
3rd – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
A/T interlock
Held in
coupling pat- 4th – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
tern
Held in
5th X X – X ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001EI
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
II.
BCIA0031E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-102, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and function. Refer to AT-162, "DTC P1772 LOW
COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-164, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE FUNCTION" .
2. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

OK or NG B
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT

DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING PFP:00000
Description NCS001EJ
Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at M1 position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001EK

ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES SW 2
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001EL

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING” with CONSULT-II or 13th judgement flicker without
– When TCM monitors each ATF pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when
engine brake of 1st gear acts other than at M1 position.
Possible Cause NCS001EM
● ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001EN
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to rev engine into red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously preformed, always turn ignition switch OFF and
WITH CONSULT-II
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “ENGINE
SPEED”, “MANU MODE SW” and “GEAR”.
4. Start engine.
ENGINE SPEED: 1,200 rpm
MANU MODE SW: ON BCIA0031E
GEAR: “1” position

DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001EO
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine. B
3. Drive vehicle in the “M” position (1st gear), and confirm the ON/ AT
OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”.
D
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON E
ATF PRES SCIA4670E
SW 2 Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . OFF

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT G
CUIT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I

Check the following. J
OK or NG
K
L
4. CHECK DTC
M
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940
Description NCS001EP
Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001EQ

I/C SOLENOID
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001ER

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 5th judgement flicker without
Possible Cause NCS001ES
● Input clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001ET
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “ACCELE POSI”,
“SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR”.
4. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position BCIA0031E
GEAR: “3” Þ “4” (I/C ON/OFF)
WITH GST

DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001EU
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine. AT
4. Read out the value of “I/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value D
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A E
SCIA4793E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. F

G
CUIT" .
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
perature Sensor 2" . K
4. CHECK DTC L
OK or NG
M
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940
Description NCS001EV
● Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehi-
cle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001EW

I/C SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 3
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001EX

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or 5th judgement flicker with-
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause NCS001EY
(Solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Input clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001EZ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
BCIA0031E
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1754) is detected, go to AT-149, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-147, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. A
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001F0
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS B
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. AT
3. Drive vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the D
ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 3” and electrical current
value of “I/C SOLENOID”.
Display value E
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A SCIA4795E F
ATF PRES SW 3
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-179, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- I
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. J
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM K

L
OK or NG
M
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “AT-148, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .”.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940
Description NCS001F1
Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001F2

FR/B SOLENOID
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001F3

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 6th judgement flicker with-
Possible Cause NCS001F4
● Front brake solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001F5
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
GEAR: “3” Þ “4” (FR/B ON/OFF)
WITH GST

DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001F6
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. AT
4. Read out the value of “FR/B SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value D
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A E
SCIA4793E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. F

G
CUIT" .
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC L
OK or NG
M
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940
Description NCS001F7
● Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehi-
cle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001F8

FR/B SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 1
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001F9

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or 6th judgement flicker with-
Possible Cause NCS001FA
● Front brake solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001FB
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
BCIA0031E

DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001FC
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. AT
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm D
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1” and electrical
current value of “FR/B SOLENOID”.
Display value E
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A SCIA4796E F
ATF PRES SW 1
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. J

L
OK or NG
M
4. CHECK DTC
● Refer to .
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940
Description NCS001FD
Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001FE

Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0.6 - 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001FF

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 2nd judgement flicker without
Possible Cause NCS001FG
● Direct clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001FH
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
GEAR: “1” Þ “2” (D/C ON/OFF)
WITH GST

DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001FI
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
4. Read out the value of “D/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value D
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A E
SCIA4793E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. F

G
CUIT" .
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC L
OK or NG
M
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940
Description NCS001FJ
● Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch,
vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001FK

D/C SOLENOID
ATF PRES SW 5
Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001FL

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or 2nd judgement flicker with-
Possible Cause NCS001FM
● Direct clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001FN
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
BCIA0031E

DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001FO
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. AT
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm D
the display actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5” and electrical cur-
rent value of “D/C SOLENOID”.
Display value E
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . 0 - 0.05 A SCIA4797E F
ATF PRES SW 5
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. J

L
OK or NG
M
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940
Description NCS001FP
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001FQ

HLR/C SOL
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001FR

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 8th judgement flicker without
Possible Cause NCS001FS
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001FT
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
GEAR: “2” Þ “3” (HLR/C ON/OFF)
WITH GST

DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001FU
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
4. Read out the value of “HLR/C SOLENOID” while driving.
Display value D
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer
0.6 - 0.8 A
to AT-22 .
HLR/C SOL E
SCIA4793E
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to
0 - 0.05 A
AT-22 .
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
G
CUIT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I

J
OK or NG K
L
4. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-154, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . M
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
PFP:31940
Description NCS001FV
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001FW

HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001FX

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or 8th judgement flicker without
Possible Cause NCS001FY
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001FZ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
BCIA0031E

WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001G0
With CONSULT-II
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm D
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6” and electrical
current value of “HLR/C SOL”.
Display value E
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
High and low reverse clutch disengaged.
0.6 - 0.8 A
Refer to AT-22 . SCIA4798E F
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer
0 - 0.05 A
to AT-22 .
High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer G
ON
to AT-22 .
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged.
OFF
Refer to AT-22 . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. I

Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-179, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- J
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. K
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM L

● A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. M
OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940
Description NCS001G1
Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001G2

ON OFF SOL
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001G3

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 7th judgement flicker with-
out CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the sole-
noid valve.
Possible Cause NCS001G4
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001G5
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “MANU MODE
SW” and “GEAR”.
4. Start engine.
MANU MODE SW: ON
GEAR: “1” or “2” (LC/B ON/OFF) BCIA0031E
WITH GST

DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001G6
With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine. AT
4. Read out the value of “ON OFF SOL” while driving.
Item name Condition Display value D
ON OFF SOL
E
OK or NG SCIA4794E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
F
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-179, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- G
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H

OK or NG J
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K
4. CHECK DTC
L
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END M
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940
Description NCS001G7
● Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001G8

ON OFF SOL
ATF PRES SW 2
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001G9

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or 7th judgement flicker with-
Possible Cause NCS001GA
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001GB
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
MANU MODE SW: ON
GEAR: “1” or “2” (LC/B ON/OFF)
II. If DTC (P1774) is detected, go to AT-165, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to AT-163, "Diagnostic Proce- BCIA0031E
dure" .
WITH GST

DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001GC
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. B
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode (1st or 2nd gear), and confirm AT
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF
SOL”.
D
ON OFF SOL
Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-22 . OFF E
SCIA4794E
ATF PRES SW 2
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
G
Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-179, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- H
CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM J

OK or NG K
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L
4. CHECK DTC
M
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH
DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH PFP:34901
Description NCS001GD
Manual mode switch is installed in A/T device. It sends manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch
signals to TCM.
TCM sends the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. By CAN communication line. Then manual mode
switch position is indicated on the A/T indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-185, "A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT" .
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode NCS001GE
Item name Condition Display Value

MANU MODE SW
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW
selector lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER
selector lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001GF

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1815 MANU MODE SW/CIR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM moni-
tors Manual mode, Non manual mode, Up or Down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossi-
ble input pattern occurs 1 second or more.
Possible Cause NCS001GG
(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
● Manual mode select switch (Into control device)
● Manual mode position select switch (Into control device)
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001GH
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine.
MANU MODE SW: ON
BCIA0031E

Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW NCS001GI
AT
TCWM0498E

TCWM0499E

Wire A
color
3 L CAN-H – –
8 P CAN-L – – B
9 GY Starter relay
AT
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001GJ
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE D

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
E
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT F
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) G
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “MANU MODE SW”, H
“NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”.
Item name Condition Display Value
I
MANU MODE SW
Manual shift gate position OFF SCIA4988E J
NON M-MODE SW
selector lever: +side ON
UP SW LEVER K
selector lever: -side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF L
Without CONSULT-II
Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the M
position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Check the following items.
● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-170, "Component Inspection" .
● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector for A/T device (manual mode
switch).
● Unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
Component Inspection NCS001GK
MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check continuity between terminals.
Item Position Connector Terminal Continuity
Manual mode Auto 9 - 10

select switch Manual 6-9
M67 Yes
Manual mode UP 8-9
position select
switch DOWN 7-9
SCIA2112E

DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1
DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 PFP:25240

A
Description NCS001GL
Fail-safe function to detect front brake solenoid valve condition.

B
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001GM

Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON AT
ATF PRES SW 1
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001GN D

● Diagnostic trouble code “P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects
that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 E
is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause NCS001GO
F
(Switch circuit is open or shorted.) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001GP
CAUTION:
H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
J
1. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions L
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. M
BCIA0031E
II.

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001GQ

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”.
ATF PRES SW 1
OK or NG PCIA0067E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.


A
Description NCS001GR
Fail-safe function to detect input clutch solenoid valve condition.

B
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001GS

Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON AT
ATF PRES SW 3
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001GT D

Possible Cause NCS001GU
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001GV
CAUTION:
H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
J
1. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
BCIA0031E
II.

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001GW

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm
ATF PRES SW 3
OK or NG PCIA0067E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.


A
Description NCS001GX
Fail-safe function to detect direct clutch solenoid valve condition.

B
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001GY

Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON AT
ATF PRES SW 5
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001GZ D

Possible Cause NCS001H0
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001H1
CAUTION:
H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
J
1. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
BCIA0031E
II.

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001H2

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm
ATF PRES SW 5
OK or NG PCIA0067E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.


A
Description NCS001H3
Fail-safe function to detect high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve condition.
B
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001H4

High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-22 . ON AT
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged Refer to AT-22 . OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic NCS001H5 D

Possible Cause NCS001H6
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure NCS001H7
CAUTION:
H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
J
1. Start engine.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
BCIA0031E
II.

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001H8

With CONSULT-II
3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm
High and low reverse clutch engaged.
ON
Refer to AT-22 .
ATF PRES SW 6
High and low reverse clutch disengaged
OFF PCIA0067E
Refer to AT-22 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

CUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:00100

A
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN NCS001H9
AT
TCWM0497E

Wire
color
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
5 B Ground Always 0V
– Battery voltage
6 Y Power supply
– 0V
10 B Ground Always 0V
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001HA
1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1

2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector termi-
nals and ground.
Item Connector Terminal Voltage
1 - Ground
Battery voltage
TCM F44 2 - Ground
6 - Ground 0V
OK or NG SCIA2104E
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2

3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector termi-
nals and ground.
Item Connector Terminal Voltage
1 - Ground
TCM F44 2 - Ground Battery voltage
6 - Ground
OK or NG SCIA2105E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.


● Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly harness connector F44 terminals 1, 2
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and A/T assembly harness connector F44 terminal 6 B
● 10 A fuse (No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link block) and 10 A fuse (No. 83, located in the IPDM E/
R)
● Ignition switch, Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
D
4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

E
3. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F44 F
terminals and ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
H
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA2106E I

J
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS L
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .

OK or NG M
NG-1 >> Self-diagnosis does not activate: GO TO 7.
NG-2 >> DTC is displayed: Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULT MODE" .


Sensor 2" .
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
minals and TCM connector terminals.
F44 1
nector Yes
F44 2
nector Yes
SCIA5464E
F44 6
nector Yes

minals and TCM connector terminals.
F44 5
nector Yes
F44 10
nector Yes
SCIA5465E
OK or NG

CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIR-
CUIT
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIR-

CUIT PFP:18002 A
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001HB
Item name Condition Display value B

Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLSD THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
AT
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal. OFF
D
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001HC

Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-102, "Diagnostic Pro- E
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-104, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . F
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT G
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) H
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “CLSD THL I
POS” and “W/O THL POS”.
Monitor Item
Accelerator Pedal Operation J
CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS
Released ON OFF
Fully depressed OFF ON PCIA0070E K
OK or NG
NG >> Check the following items. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts. L
● Perform the self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-122, "SELF-DIAG
RESULTS MODE" (for VQ35DE) or EC-783, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" (for VK45DE).
● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT PFP:25320
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001HD

BRAKE SW
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001HE

NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “BRAKE SW”.
BRAKE SW
OK or NG
3. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector E210
terminals 1 and 2. Refer to AT-186, "Wiring Diagram — AT — NON-
DTC" .
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed Yes
When brake pedal is released No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to

BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
OK or NG SCIA2144E
OK >> Check the following items. If NG, repair or replace dam-

aged parts.
● Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch.
● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch and unified meter and A/C amp.
NG >> Repair or replace the stop lamp switch.

A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT
A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT PFP:24810

A
Description NCS001HF
TCM sends the switch signals to combination meters. By CAN communication line. Then manual mode switch
position is indicated on the A/T indicator. B
CONSULT-II Reference Value NCS001HG
Item name Condition Display value AT

GEAR During driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Diagnostic Procedure NCS001HH

D
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
E
1. Start engine.
with CONSULT-II and read out the value of “GEAR”.
F
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual
gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually
coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “-
(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear). G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END PCIA0065E
NG >> Check the following. H
A/T INDICATOR SYMPTOM CHART

Items Presumed Location of Trouble I
Manual mode switch
The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the
manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual ● Refer to AT-166, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
mode possible). A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated) J
The A/T indicator is not indicated.
● Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
The actual gear position changes, but the A/T indicator is not indi- Perform the self-diagnosis function.
cated. K
● Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
The actual gear position and the indication on the A/T indicator Perform the self-diagnosis function.
do not coincide. ● Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
L
Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the A/ Check the unified meter and A/C amp.
T indicator. ● Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS PFP:00007
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC NCS001HI
TCWM0500E

AT
TCWM0501E

TCWM0502E

Wire A
color
3 L CAN-H – –
K-line (CONSULT- B
4 PU The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II. –
II signal)
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V
Back-up lamp
7 OR
relay
AT
Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage
8 P CAN-L – –
D
A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On NCS001HJ
SYMPTOM:
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to E
“ON”.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE F
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-102, "TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . G
NO >> GO TO 2. H
2. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT

Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J

K
CUIT" .
OK or NG L
M

Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” or “N” Position NCS001HK
SYMPTOM:
● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
● Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position.
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-112, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage. Refer to AT-231, "Checking of A/T Posi-
tion" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-231, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E
3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Check starting system. Refer to SC-8, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG

In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed NCS001HL
SYMPTOM: A
Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated,
allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
B
AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
D
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.
E
Check the control linkage. Refer to AT-231, "Checking of A/T Posi- F
tion" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
A/T Position" .
H
SCIA2119E
I
3. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components. Refer to AT-251, "Parking Components (2WD Models Only)" (2WD models) or J
AT-294, "Disassembly" (AWD models).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION L

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-53, "A/T Fluid Condition
Check" . M
OK or NG
NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-64, "Symp-
tom Chart" (Symptom No.65).
SCIA5199E

In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves NCS001HM
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

tion" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-64, "Symp-
tom Chart" (Symptom No.67).
SCIA5199E

5. CHECK SYMPTOM A
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END B
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK TCM AT
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-89, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
D
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END E
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) NCS001HN
SYMPTOM: F
A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from “N” to “D” position.
G
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . H
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-
103, "Judgement Self-diagnosis Code" . I
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. ENGINE IDLE SPEED J
Check the engine idle speed. Refer to EC-82, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for VQ35DE) or EC-
742, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for VK45DE).
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust engine idle speed. Refer to EC-82, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for VQ35DE)
L
or EC-742, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (for VK45DE).

M
tion" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E


Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-54, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG-1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6.
NG-2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7.
SAT494G

1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following.
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

sor 2" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9. AT
SCIA5199E
E
Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-64,
F
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.1).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. G
10. CHECK SYMPTOM

H
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK TCM J

connector. K
OK or NG

Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position NCS001HO
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
103, "Judgement Self-diagnosis Code" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

tion" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
4. CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “M” and “R” positions.
Refer to AT-53, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK in “M” position, NG in “R” position>>GO TO 5
NG in both “M” and “R” positions>>GO TO 8.
SAT493G


– Reverse brake. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

D
Check the line pressure with the engine idling. Refer to AT-54, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 9.
F
G
SAT494G
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" . I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen- L
sor 2" .
3. Check the following. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.


Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK SYMPTOM

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK TCM

connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position NCS001HP
SYMPTOM: A
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-102, "TCM SELF-DIAG- AT
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT- D
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE E

tion" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-231, "Adjustment of G
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
K
SAT638A
M
4. CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-
53, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 7.
SAT493G


Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-54, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SAT494G

sor 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

sor 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.
SCIA5199E


OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 10.
AT
10. CHECK SYMPTOM
D
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
E
11. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-89, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . F
connector.
OK or NG G
H
"Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43). I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 NCS001HQ
SYMPTOM:
K
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on “Cruise Test - Part 1” and “Cruise Test - Part2”.
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM L
Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position.

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-196, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position" .

NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)"
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR

Check accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to AT-131, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Refill ATF.
SAT638A

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-54, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SAT494G

sor 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.


sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" . B
– Power train system. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" . AT
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION E
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-53, "A/T Fluid Condition F
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. G
NG >> GO TO 12.
SCIA5199E I

J
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK SYMPTOM L
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 2" .
OK or NG M
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK TCM

connector.
OK or NG


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 NCS001HR
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-199, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position" , AT-201, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

NO >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
SAT638A

PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
SAT494G


sor 2" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" . B
OK or NG AT
OK >> GO TO 7.
D
1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen- E
sor 2" .
3. Check the following. F
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-294, "DISASSEMBLY" . G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H

I
Check" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.
K
SCIA5199E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.

10. CHECK TCM

connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 NCS001HS
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Started From D1" .

NO >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.
SAT638A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A

PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG-2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 6. AT
D
SAT494G
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E
sor 2" .
F
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Oil Pump" . G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
1. Check control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-239, "Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sen- I
sor 2" .
3. Check the following. J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. L

M
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.
SCIA5199E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK TCM

connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 NCS001HT
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Started From D1" .

NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. B
NG >> Refill ATF.
AT
D
SAT638A
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE E
PRESSURE TEST" .
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG-2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 6. G
SAT494G
sor 2" . J
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-312, "Oil Pump" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

M
sor 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.


Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK TCM

connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 NCS001HU
SYMPTOM: A
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
B
AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
Started From D1" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . F
103, "Judgement Self-diagnosis Code" . G
NO >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
NG >> Refill ATF.
K
SAT638A
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE L
PRESSURE TEST" .
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
SAT494G


sor 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

sor 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 1" .
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.

10. CHECK TCM A

connector. B
OK or NG

D
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 9.
A/T Does Not Lock-up NCS001HV F
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not lock-up at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE G

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-102, "TCM SELF-DIAG- H
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT- I
NO >> GO TO 2.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.
L
SAT638A

PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
SAT494G


sor 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

sor 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 10.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. CHECK TCM A
connector. B
OK or NG

D
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 8.
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition NCS001HW F
SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.

NO >> GO TO 2.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.
L
SAT638A


Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

Lock-up Is Not Released NCS001HX
SYMPTOM: A
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SYMPTOM E

OK or NG F
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
3. CHECK TCM
2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness H
connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle NCS001HY
J
SYMPTOM:
When a shift-down is performed, the engine speed does not smoothly return to the idling speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE K

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF. M
SAT638A

NO >> GO TO 3.


Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode NCS001HZ
SYMPTOM: A
Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used.
1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-166, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-102, "TCM SELF-DIAG- E
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-92, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT- F
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear NCS001I0
G
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from M5 to M4 position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear.
H
I
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results? J
NO >> GO TO 2.
K
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF. M
SAT638A


tion" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-166, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM A
connector. B
OK or NG

D
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 7.
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear NCS001I1 F
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from M4 to M3 position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear.

NO >> GO TO 2.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.
L
SAT638A

tion" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear NCS001I2
SYMPTOM: A
When shifted from M3 to M2 position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.
G
SAT638A
I
tion" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-231, "Adjustment of K
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.


Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear NCS001I3
SYMPTOM: A
When shifted from M2 to M1 position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear.
NO >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.
G
SAT638A
I
tion" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.


Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake NCS001I4
SYMPTOM: A
No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear.
NO >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.
G
SAT638A
I
tion" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
A/T Position" .
SCIA2119E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.


Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.
SCIA5199E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
connector.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:34901

A
Control Device Removal and Installation NCS001I5
AT
SCIA7753E M
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Position indicator plate
4. A/T device harness connector 5. Snap pin 6. Conical washer
7. Plain washer 8. Busing 9. Collar
10. Control rod 11. Bracket 12. Dust cover
13. Dust cover plate 14. Shift lock solenoid and park position 15. Control device assembly
switch assembly
16. Position lamp
Refer to GI section to make sure icons (symbol marks) in the figure. Refer to GI-11, "Components" .

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect lower lever of control device and control rod.
2. Remove knob cover (1) below selector lever downward.
3. Pull lock pin (2) out of selector lever knob (3).
4. Remove selector lever knob (3).
5. Remove A/T console finisher. Refer to IP-10, "Component Parts
Drawing" .
6. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "Component Parts
Drawing" .
7. Remove rear ventilator duct 2. Refer to ATC-133, "Removal and
Installation" .
SCIA7733E
8. Remove key interlock cable (1) from control device. Refer to AT-
237, "Removal and Installation" .
9. Disconnect A/T device harness connector (2).
10. Remove control device assembly.
SCIA7754E
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal. Be careful of the following:
● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position. Refer to AT-231, "Adjustment of A/T Posi-
tion" and AT-231, "Checking of A/T Position" .
Control Rod Removal and Installation NCS001I6
CONTROL ROD COMPONENTS
SCIA6589E
1. Control device assembly 2. A/T assembly 3. Manual lever

4. Control rod 5. Lower lever

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect lower lever of control device and control rod. A
2. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.
3. Remove control rod from vehicle.
B
AT
SCIA5736E
D
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal. Be careful of the following: E
● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position. Refer to AT-231, "Adjustment of A/T Posi-
tion" and AT-231, "Checking of A/T Position" .
Adjustment of A/T Position NCS001I7 F
1. Loosen nut of control rod.
2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in “P” position.
G
3. While pressing lower lever toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position
direction), tighten nut to the specified torque. Refer to AT-230,
"CONTROL ROD COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION: H
Do not push the bracket.
I
SCIA2119E
Checking of A/T Position NCS001I8 J

1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (Do not start engine).
2. Check selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also check
selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. K
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Check the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown L
by the shift position indicator and the transmission body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly should be as shown in the figure. M
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking.
7. Check the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in
the “R” position. Check the back-up lamps does not illuminate
when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the “P” or
“N” position.
8. Check the engine can only be started with the selector lever in
the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P” position, SCIA7465E
engine can be started even when selector lever is moved for-

ward and backward.)
9. Check transmission is locked completely in “P” position.
10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, check manual mode is displayed on combination meter.
Shift selector lever to “+” and “-” sides, and check set shift position changes. (Only while a vehicle is oper-
ating.)

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM PFP:34950
Description NCS001I9
● The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:

With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P” position.
● The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock sole-
noid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location NCS001IA
SCIA2149E

Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT NCS001IB
AT
TCWM0503E

Diagnostic Procedure NCS001IC
SYMPTOM 1:
● Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal
applied.
● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
● Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position.
● Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P” position.
1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Check the key interlock cable for damage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace key interlock cable. Refer to AT-236, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" .
2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION

Check the selector lever position for damage. Refer to AT-231, "Checking of A/T Position"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust A/T position. Refer to AT-231, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .
3. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH

1. Connect A/T device harness connector.
3. Selector lever is set in “P” position.
4. Check operation.
Condition Brake pedal Operation
When ignition switch is turned to ON and selector lever is set in Depressed Yes
“P” position. Released No
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK POWER SOURCE

2. Check the voltage between A/T device harness connector M67
terminal 1 and ground. Refer to AT-233, "Wiring Diagram — AT
— SHIFT" .
Condition Brake pedal Data (Approx.)
When ignition switch is turned to Depressed Battery voltage

ON. Released 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2122E

5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector B
E210 terminals 3 and 4.
Condition Continuity
AT
When brake pedal is depressed Yes
When brake pedal is released No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to D

BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. E
SCIA2126E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F
Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and stop lamp switch harness connector E210 terminal G
3.
● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness connector E210 terminal 4 and A/T device
harness connector M67 terminal 1.
H
● 10 A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
● Ignition switch, Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG I
J
7. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. K
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M67
terminal 2 and ground.
L
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace shift lock solenoid and park position switch M
assembly.
NG >> Repair open circuit in harness or connectors.
SCIA2125E

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE PFP:34908
Components NCS001ID
SCIA7755E
1. Key interlock cable 2. Key cylinder

A. Holder B. Clip C. Slider
D. Adjuster holder E. Interlock rod F. Unlock
G. Lock
CAUTION:
● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or inter-
ference with adjacent parts.
● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N
(4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Removal and Installation NCS001IE
REMOVAL A
1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster
holder.
2. Remove casing cap from bracket of control device assembly B
and remove interlock rod from adjuster holder.
AT
D
SCIA1230E
3. Remove holder (A) from key cylinder (1) and remove key inter- E
lock cable (2).
(B) : Clips
F
K
SCIA7761E

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
INSTALLATION
1. Set key interlock cable (2) to key cylinder (1) and install holder
(A).
2. Clamp key interlock cable (2) and fix to key interlock cable (2)
with clips (B).
3. Turn ignition key to “LOCK” position.
4. Set selector lever to “P” position.
SCIA7761E
5. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.

6. Install casing cap to bracket.
7. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod.
CAUTION:
Do not touch adjacent parts of key interlock cable when
slider is being held.
Insert slider into key interlock rod straightly.
SCIA1232E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE PFP:00000

A
Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 NCS001IF
COMPONENTS
B
AT
M
SCIA5478E
1. A/T 2. Snap ring 3. Sub-harness

4. Control valve with TCM 5. Bracket 6. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
7. Oil pan gasket 8. Oil pan 9. Magnet
10. Drain plug 11. Drain plug gasket 12. Oil pan mounting bolt
13. Terminal cord assembly 14. O-ring
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Drain ATF through drain plug.
3. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
6. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5021E
7. Push A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA5022E
8. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
SCIA2308E
9. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of

malfunction. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates
varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches
to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-15, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .
SCIA5199E
10. Remove magnets from oil pan.
SCIA5200E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
11. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

A
CAUTION:
AT
SCIA5023E
D
12. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and A/T
fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
E
G
SCIA5446E
13. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. H

CAUTION:
I
SCIA7524E K
14. Straighten terminal clip to free revolution sensor harness.

L
SCIA7525E
15. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA5139E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
16. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.

CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
SCIA5142E
17. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from con-
trol valve with TCM.
SCIA5301E
18. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
SCIA5264E
19. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5155E
20. Disconnect TCM connectors.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connectors.
SCIA5447E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
21. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve

with TCM using a flat-bladed screwdriver. A
AT
SCIA5448E
D
22. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch
connector.
CAUTION: E
G
SCIA5449E
Installation
H
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/F fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T
Fluid" .
I
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch con-
nector.
L
SCIA5449E
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with

TCM. M
SCIA5450E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
3. Connect TCM connectors.
SCIA5447E
4. Install O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA5155E
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
SCIA5264E
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control

valve with TCM, and then tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
mounting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-239, "COM-
PONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with
TCM.
SCIA5301E
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.

CAUTION:
● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs
turbine revolution sensor hole.
● Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so
as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
● Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case.
SCIA5034E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with A

manual plate projection.
AT
SCIA5142E
D
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts E
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
F
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA5139E
H
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After
that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-239, "COMPONENTS"
I
.
K
SCIA5140E
10. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. L
SCIA5023E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
11. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
SCIA5446E
12. Connect revolution sensor connector.
SCIA7524E
13. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clip.
SCIA7525E
14. Install magnets in oil pan.
SCIA5200E
15. Install oil pan to transmission case.

a. Install oil pan gasket to oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.
● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case.

CAUTION: A
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. B
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan mounting surface.
AT
SCIA2308E
D
c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-
cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
Refer to AT-239, "COMPONENTS" .
E
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
16. Install drain plug to oil pan, and then tighten drain plug to the
F
specified torque. Refer to AT-239, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
G
SCIA4113E
17. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. H

CAUTION:
I
SCIA5038E
K
18. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.
19. Connect A/T assembly harness connector.
L
20. Connect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
21. Install front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installa-
tion" .
M
22. Pour ATF into A/T assembly. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T
Fluid" .
23. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.
SCIA5039E
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
SCIA2308E

SCIA5199E

CAUTION:
SCIA5023E
8. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2

harness.
SCIA5146E

SCIA5302E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

A
AT
SCIA5264E
D
Installation
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/F fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T E
Fluid" .
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
F
SCIA5264E
I
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control
mounting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-239, "COM-
PONENTS" . J
L
SCIA5302E
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

M
SCIA5023E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
4. Securely fasten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with ter-

minal clip.
SCIA5146E

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surface.

CAUTION:
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.

SCIA2308E

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
7. Connect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. SCIA4113E
8. Install front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installa-
tion" .
9. Pour ATF into A/T assembly. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T Fluid" .

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Parking Components (2WD Models Only) NCS001IG
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA7433E
1. Rear oil seal 2. Rear extension 3. Parking actuator support K

4. Parking pawl 5. Return spring 6. Pawl shaft
7. Self-sealing bolt 8. Seal ring 9. Parking gear
10. Output shaft 11. Bearing race 12. Needle bearing L
However, refer to the following symbol for others.
* : Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-48, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . M
REMOVAL
2. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Components" .
3. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove control rod. Refer to AT-230, "Control Rod Removal and Installation" .
5. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
6. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to AT-266, "Removal and Installation (2WD
Models)" .
7. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to AT-266, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)" .

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
8. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-

mission case.
SCIA6941E
9. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.
SCIA3432E
10. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing.)
SCIA3431E
11. Remove bearing race from output shaft.
SCIA5245E
12. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/

right.
SCIA5246E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
13. Remove parking gear from output shaft.

A
AT
SCIA5247E
D
14. Remove seal rings from output shaft.
G
SCIA5209E
15. Remove needle bearing from rear extension. H

16. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension.
K
SCIA3423E
17. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from L
rear extension.
SCIA3424E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
18. Remove return spring from parking pawl.
SCIA2445E
19. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension.
SCIA3524E
INSPECTION
● If the contact surface on parking actuator support, parking pawl,
etc. has excessive wear, abrasion, bend, or any other damage,
replace the components.
SCIA5143E
SCIA5144E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: A
After completing installation, check A/T position, A/T fluid leakage and A/F fluid level. Refer to AT-231,
"Checking of A/T Position" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. As shown in the figure, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the B
rear extension until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse rear oil seal. AT
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
SCIA5311E E
2. Install return spring to parking pawl.

F
SCIA2445E
I
3. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
extension.
J
L
SCIA3424E
4. Install parking actuator support to rear extension.

M
5. Install needle bearing to rear extension.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA3423E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
6. Install seal rings in output shaft.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
SCIA5209E
7. Install parking gear to output shaft
SCIA5247E
8. Install output shaft to transmission case.
SCIA5246E
9. Install bearing race to output shaft.
SCIA5245E
10. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-48, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.
SCIA5212E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
11. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case. (With nee-

dle bearing.) A
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear B
extension assembly.
AT
SCIA3431E
D
12. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-251, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION: E
Do not reuse self-sealing bolts.
G
SCIA6941E
13. Install engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to AT-266, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)" . H
14. Install rear engine mounting member. Refer to AT-266, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)" .
15. Install control rod. Refer to AT-230, "Control Rod Removal and Installation" .
16. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" . I
17. Install exhaust front tube and center muffler. Refer to EX-3, "Components" .
18. Install drain plug in oil pan, and then tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-239, "COMPO-
NENTS" . J
CAUTION:
19. Pour ATF into A/T assembly. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T Fluid" . K

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Oil Seal NCS001IH
REMOVAL
1. Remove center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "Compo-
nents" .
2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and
Installation" .
3. Remove front propeller shaft (AWD models). Refer to PR-5,
"Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly (AWD models).
Refer to TF-44, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD
models) or adapter case assembly (AWD models).
SCIA5410E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T
Fluid" .
1. As shown in the figure, use the drift to drive rear oil seal into rear
extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly
(AWD models) until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse rear oil seal.
2. Install transfer assembly to A/T assembly (AWD models). Refer

to TF-44, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Install front propeller shaft (AWD models). Refer to PR-5,
"Removal and Installation" .
4. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installa-
tion" .
5. Install center muffler. Refer to EX-3, "Components" .
SCIA5411E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only) NCS001II
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA7075E
1. Rear extension 2. A/T 3. Revolution sensor K

4. Oil pan gasket 5. Oil pan 6. Oil pan mounting bolt
7. Drain plug gasket 8. Drain plug 9. Self-sealing bolt
Refer to GI section to make sure icons (symbol marks) in the figure. Refer to GI-11, "Components" . L
* : Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-48, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants"
M
REMOVAL

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
SCIA2308E

SCIA5199E

CAUTION:
When setting transmission jack, place wooden blocks to prevent from damaging control valve
with TCM and transmission case.
10. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to AT-266, "Removal and Installation (2WD
Models)" .
11. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
SCIA6941E
12. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.
SCIA3432E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
13. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing.) A
AT
SCIA3431E
D
14. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector E
G
SCIA7524E
15. Straighten terminal clip to free revolution sensor harness. H
SCIA7525E
K
16. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
L
● Do not disassemble.
● Do not allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front

edge magnetic area. M
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.
SCIA3997E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check A/T position, A/T fluid leakage and A/F fluid level. Refer to AT-231,
"Checking of A/T Position" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. Install revolution sensor in transmission case, and then tighten
revolution sensor mounting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to
AT-259, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:

edge magnetic area.
SCIA3997E
SCIA7524E
3. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with clip.
SCIA7525E
4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

ucts and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
from transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.
SCIA5212E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
5. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case. (With nee-

dle bearing.) A
CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pole and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear B
extension assembly.
AT
SCIA3431E
D
6. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-259, "COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION: E
7. Install rear engine mounting member. Refer to AT-266,
"Removal and Installation (2WD Models)" .
F
CAUTION: G
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. SCIA6941E
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surface. H
CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as I
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. J

K
SCIA2308E
c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri- L

CAUTION: M
CAUTION:
10. Install control rod. Refer to AT-230, "Control Rod Removal and SCIA4113E
Installation" .
11. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-9, "Removal and Installation" .
12. Install exhaust front tube and center muffler. Refer to EX-3, "Components" .
13. Install front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installation" .
14. Pour ATF into A/T assembly. Refer to AT-12, "Changing A/T Fluid" .

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE PFP:31098
Removal and Installation NCS001IJ
VQ35DE ENGINE MODEL

Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.
SCIA2151E
CAUTION:
● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bend-
ing the hose.
● When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend R portion.

AIR BREATHER HOSE
VK45DE ENGINE MODEL

Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure. A
AT
I
SCIA2152E
CAUTION:
● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bend- J
ing the hose.
● When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube bend R portion. K

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY PFP:31020
Removal and Installation (2WD Models) NCS001IK
COMPONENTS
SCIA6379E
1. A/T fluid charging pipe 2. O-ring 3. Engine mounting insulator (rear)

4. Rear engine mounting member 5. Copper washer 6. Fluid cooler tube
7. Bracket 8. A/T assembly 9. A/T fluid level gauge
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
● When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
● Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
2. Remove engine cover.
3. Remove A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Remove engine under cover with power tool.
5. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installation"
7. Remove three way catalyst. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" .

10. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly.

CAUTION: A
● Do not allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front B

edge magnetic area.
11. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "VQ35DE ENGINE AT

MODELS (2WD)" .
12. Remove fluid cooler tube. SCIA2155E
13. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Instal- D
lation (2WD Models)" .
14. Remove rear cover plate. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)" .
E
15. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from F
the front of the engine.
CAUTION: G
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow
it to collide against the drain plug.
17. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. H
SCIA2288E
18. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear).
19. Remove air breather hose. Refer to AT-264, "Removal and Installation" .
I
21. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.
22. Remove O-ring from A/T fluid charging pipe. J
23. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
24. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine assembly with power tool.
25. Remove A/T assembly from vehicle with a transmission jack. K
● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
● Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.

L
SCIA0499E
INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
● After inserting a torque converter to a A/T, be sure to check dis-
tance “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
Distance “A” : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more
SAT017B

INSTALLATION
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work.
● When installing A/T assembly to the engine assembly, attach the
fixing bolts in accordance with the following standard.
Bolt No. 1 2 3 4
Number of bolts 1 5 2 2
Bolt length
55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
“ ”mm (in)
Tightening torque 75 55 47
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (7.7, 55) (5.6, 41) (4.8, 35)
SCIA3949E
● Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then,
tighten the bolts with the specified torque. Refer to AT-266,
"COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring and copper washers.
● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
● When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque con-
verter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to
confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley SCIA2288E
mounting bolts. Refer to EM-72, "INSTALLATION" .

● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that
transmission rotates freely without binding.
● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation (2WD Models)" .
● After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage, A/T fluid level, and the A/T positions of A/T. Refer to
AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" , AT-231, "Checking of A/T Position" .

Removal and Installation (AWD Models) NCS001IL
COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE) A
AT
SCIA6425E
1. A/T fluid charging pipe 2. O-ring 3. Engine mounting insulator (rear) K

4. Rear engine mounting member 5. Copper washer 6. Bracket
7. Fluid cooler tube 8. Bracket 9. A/T assembly
10. A/T fluid level gauge L

COMPONENTS (FOR VK45DE)
SCIA6426E
1. A/T fluid charging pipe 2. O-ring 3. Engine mounting insulator (rear)

4. Rear engine mounting member 5. Copper washer 6. Bracket
7. Fluid cooler tube 8. Bracket 9. Bracket
10. Bracket 11. A/T assembly 12. A/T fluid level gauge
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
● When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
● Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
2. Remove engine cover.
3. Remove A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Remove engine under cover with power tool.
7. Remove three way catalyst. Refer to EM-183, "Removal and Installation" .
8. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "Removal and Installation" .

11. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly.

CAUTION: A
● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's B

front edge magnetic area.
12. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-16, "VQ35DE ENGINE AT

MODELS (AWD)" (for VQ35DE) or SC-14, "VK45DE ENGINE
MODELS" (for VK45DE). SCIA2011E
13. Disconnect fluid cooler tube from A/T assembly. D

14. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-36, "Removal and Instal-
lation (AWD Models)" (for VQ35DE) or EM-187, "Removal and
Installation" (for VK45DE). E
G
SCIA5326E
15. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive H
plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from I
SCIA2010E K
16. Remove dynamic damper (for VQ35DE). Refer to EM-118,

"Removal and Installation (AWD Models)" . L
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow M
it to collide against the drain plug.
18. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool.
19. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear).
20. Tilt the A/T assembly slightly to keep the clearance between
body and A/T assembly, and then disconnect air breather hose SCIA2202E
from A/T fluid charging pipe. Refer to AT-264, "Removal and
Installation" .
21. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and transfer assembly harness connector.
22. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe.
23. Remove O-ring from A/T fluid charging pipe.
24. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
25. Remove bolts fixing transmission assembly to engine with power tool.

26. Remove A/T assembly with transfer from vehicle.

● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
● Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
27. Remove transfer from A/T assembly. Refer to TF-44, "Removal

and Installation" .
SCIA2203E
INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
● After inserting a torque converter to a A/T, be sure to check dis-
tance “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
Distance “A”
VQ35DE models : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more
VK45DE models : 22.0 mm (0.87 in) or more
SAT017B
INSTALLATION
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work.
● When installing A/T assembly to the engine assembly, attach the fixing bolts in accordance with the follow-
ing standard.
For VQ35DE models
Bolt No. 1 2 3 4
Bolt length
55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) 35 (1.38) 40 (1.57)
“ ”mm (in)
Tightening torque 75 47 34
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (7.7, 55) (4.8, 35) (3.5, 25)
SCIA4600E
For VK45DE models
Bolt No. 1 2*1 3 4*2

Bolt length mm (in) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 65 (2.56) 70 (2.76)
Tightening torque 113 74.0 113
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (12, 83) (7.5, 55) (12,83)
*1 : No.2 bolt also secures A/T fluid charging pipe and washer.
*2 : No.4 bolt also secures bracket.
(A) : A/T to engine SCIA7756E

● Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, A
tighten the bolts with the specified torque. Refer to AT-269,
"COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE)" or AT-270, "COMPONENTS
(FOR VK45DE)" .
B
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring and copper washers.
● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
AT
● When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque con-
verter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to SCIA2010E
confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley D

mounting bolts. Refer to EM-72, "INSTALLATION" (for VQ35DE) or EM-208, "INSTALLATION" (for
VK45DE)
● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that E
transmission rotates freely without binding.
● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-35, "Components (AWD Models)" (for VQ35DE) or
EM-187, "Components" (for VK45DE). F
● After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage, A/T fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to AT-
13, "Checking A/T Fluid" , AT-231, "Checking of A/T Position" .
G

OVERHAUL
OVERHAUL PFP:00000
Components NCS001IM
VQ35DE models
SCIA5422E

OVERHAUL
1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter
A
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race
10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly
B
13. Snap ring 14. Front sun gear 15. 3rd one-way clutch
16. Snap ring 17. Bearing race 18. Needle bearing
19. Seal ring 20. Input clutch assembly 21. Needle bearing
AT
22. Rear internal gear 23. Brake band 24. Mid carrier assembly
25. Needle bearing 26. Bearing race 27. Rear carrier assembly
28. Needle bearing 29. Mid sun gear 30. Seal ring
D
31. Rear sun gear 32. 1st one-way clutch 33. Snap ring
34. Needle bearing 35. High and low reverse clutch hub 36. Snap ring
37. Bearing race 38. Needle bearing
E

OVERHAUL
VK45DE models
SCIA7069E

4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter

OVERHAUL
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race

10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly A
13. Needle bearing 14. Snap ring 15. Front sun gear
16. 3rd one-way clutch 17. Snap ring 18. Bearing race
19. Needle bearing 20. Seal ring 21. Input clutch assembly B
22. Needle bearing 23. Rear internal gear 24. Brake band
25. Mid carrier assembly 26. Needle bearing 27. Bearing race
28. Rear carrier assembly 29. Needle bearing 30. Mid sun gear
AT
31. Seal ring 32. Rear sun gear 33. 1st one-way clutch
34. Snap ring 35. Needle bearing 36. High and low reverse clutch hub
37. Snap ring 38. Bearing race 39. Needle bearing
D
However, refer to the following symbols for others.
E
: Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-48, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .

OVERHAUL
VQ35DE models
SCIA7389E
1. Bearing race 2. High and low reverse clutch assem- 3. Needle bearing
bly
4. Direct clutch assembly 5. Needle bearing 6. Reverse brake dish plate

OVERHAUL
7. Reverse brake driven plate 8. N-sprig 9. Snap ring

10. Reverse brake retaining plate 11. Reverse brake drive plate 12. Snap ring A
13. Spring retainer 14. Return spring 15. Reverse brake piston
16. D-ring 17. D-ring
B
AT

OVERHAUL
VK45DE models
SCIA6982E
1. Bearing race 2. High and low reverse clutch assembly 3. Needle bearing
4. Direct clutch assembly 5. Needle bearing 6. Reverse brake dish plate

OVERHAUL
7. Reverse brake dish plate 8. Reverse brake driven plate 9. N-spring

10. Snap ring 11. Reverse brake retaining plate 12. Reverse brake drive plate A
13. Snap ring 14. Spring retainer 15. Return spring
16. Reverse brake piston 17. D-ring 18. D-ring
Refer to GI section to make sure icons (symbol marks) in the figure. Refer to GI-11, "Components" . B
AT

OVERHAUL
2WD models
SCIA7434E
1. Rear oil seal 2. Self-sealing bolt 3. Rear extension

4. Parking actuator support 5. Return spring 6. Parking pawl

OVERHAUL
7. Pawl shaft 8. Seal ring 9. Needle bearing

10. Revolution sensor 11. Parking gear 12. Output shaft A
13. Bearing race 14. Needle bearing 15. Manual plate
16. Parking rod 17. Manual shaft oil seal 18. Manual shaft
19. O-ring 20. Band servo anchor end pin 21. Detent spring B
22. Spacer 23. Seal ring 24. Snap ring
25. Return spring 26. O-ring 27. Servo assembly
28. Snap ring 29. Sub-harness 30. Control valve with TCM
AT
31. Bracket 32. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 33. Oil pan
34. Magnet 35. Drain plug 36. Drain plug gasket
37. Oil pan mounting bolt 38. Oil pan gasket 39. Terminal cord assembly
D
40. O-ring 41. Retaining pin 42. Transmission case
E
* : Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-48, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .

OVERHAUL
VQ35DE models for AWD
SCIA7208E
1. Rear oil seal 2. Bracket 3. Adapter case

4. Parking actuator support 5. Return spring 6. Parking pawl

OVERHAUL
7. Pawl shaft 8. Self-sealing bolt 9. Seal ring

10. Needle bearing 11. Gasket 12. Revolution sensor A
13. Parking gear 14. Output shaft 15. Bearing race
16. Needle bearing 17. Manual plate 18. Parking rod
19. Manual shaft oil seal 20. Manual shaft 21. O-ring B
22. Band servo anchor end pin 23. Detent spring 24. Spacer
25. Seal ring 26. Snap ring 27. Return spring
28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring
AT
31. Sub-harness 32. Control valve with TCM 33. Bracket
34. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 35. Oil pan 36. Magnet
D
40. Oil pan gasket 41. Terminal cord assembly 42. O-ring
43. Retaining pin 44. Transmission case
E

OVERHAUL
VK45DE models for 4WD
SCIA7601J
1. Rear oil seal 2. Self-sealing bolt 3. Bracket

4. Adapter case 5. Parking actuator support 6. Parking pawl

OVERHAUL
7. Return spring 8. Pawl shaft 9. Seal ring

10. Needle bearing 11. Gasket 12. Revolution sensor A
13. Parking gear 14. Output shaft 15. Bearing race
16. Needle bearing 17. Manual plate 18. Parking rod
19. Manual shaft oil seal 20. Manual shaft 21. O-ring B
22. Band servo anchor end pin 23. Detent spring 24. Spacer
25. Seal ring 26. Snap ring 27. Return spring
28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring
AT
31. Sub-harness 32. Control valve with TCM 33. Bracket
34. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 35. Oil pan 36. Magnet
D
40. Oil pan gasket 41. Terminal cord assembly 42. O-ring
43. Retaining pin 44. Transmission case
E

OVERHAUL
Oil Channel NCS001IN
2WD models
SCIA6387E

OVERHAUL

A
AT
SCIA6487E

OVERHAUL
VK45DE models for AWD
SCIA5189E

OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap

Rings NCS001IO
A
2WD models
B
AT
SCIA6535E

OVERHAUL
SCIA6488E

OVERHAUL
VK45DE models for AWD

A
AT
SCIA7223E

DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY PFP:31020
Disassembly NCS001IP
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble parts behind drum support. Refer to AT-18, "Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)"
, AT-19, "Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)" or AT-20, "Cross-sectional View (VK45DE
Models for AWD)" .
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turing while
pulling straight out.
SCIA5010E
3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as

a. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
b. When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one-way
clutch spline using screwdriver.
c. Make sure that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.
SCIA3171E
4. Remove converter housing from transmission case.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
SCIA3427E

DISASSEMBLY
5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.

A
AT
SCIA5011E
D
6. Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmis-
sion case.
E
G
SCIA2300E
7. Attach the sliding hammers to oil pump assembly and extract it H

evenly from transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Fully tighten sliding hammer screw.
I
● Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump
assembly edge surface.
SCIA5474E
8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.
SCIA5172E

DISASSEMBLY
9. Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly.
SCIA5252E
10. Remove needle bearing from front sun gear.
SCIA2808E
11. Remove front sun gear assembly from front carrier assembly.
NOTE:
Remove front sun gear by rotating left/right.
SCIA5014E
12. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly.
SCIA2470E
13. Remove front carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly. (With
input clutch assembly and rear internal gear.)
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove it with needle bearing.
SCIA5015E

DISASSEMBLY
14. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case. A
AT
SCIA6512E
D
15. Remove brake band from transmission case.
G
SCIA2580E
● To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not H

stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in
the figure at right. I
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band.
● Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or
burns. J
SAT655
K
16. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a

unit. L
SCIA5017E
17. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5697E

DISASSEMBLY
18. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly.
SCIA2805E
19. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.
SCIA2804E
20. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5175E
21. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.
SCIA2803E
22. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove then with bearing race and needle
bearing.
SCIA5018E

DISASSEMBLY
23. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutch
assembly. A
CAUTION:
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and
low reverse clutch assembly edge surface. B
AT
SCIA2306E
D
24. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.
G
SCIA5019E
25. Remove needle bearing from drum support. H
SCIA5198E K
26. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.

L
SCIA5021E
27. Push A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
SCIA5022E

DISASSEMBLY
SCIA2308E

malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band)
may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
SCIA5199E
30. Remove magnets from oil pan.
SCIA5200E

CAUTION:
SCIA5023E
32. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and A/T
fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
SCIA5446E

DISASSEMBLY
33. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.

A
CAUTION:
AT
SCIA7524E
D
34. Straighten terminal clip to free revolution sensor harness.
G
SCIA7526E
35. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. H

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
I
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1
J
SCIA5025E K
36. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.

CAUTION: L
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
M
SCIA5260E
SCIA5301E

DISASSEMBLY
SCIA5264E
39. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
SCIA5155E
40. Disconnect TCM connectors.

CAUTION:
SCIA5447E
41. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve

with TCM using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA5448E
42. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch

connector.
CAUTION:
SCIA5449E

DISASSEMBLY
43. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (AWD models) according to
the following procedures. A
a. 2WD models
i. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case. B
AT
SCIA6941E
E
ii. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.
H
SCIA5028E
iii. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With I

needle bearing.)
SCIA5029E L

DISASSEMBLY
b. AWD models
i. Remove tightening bolts (1) for adapter case assembly and
transmission case. [With bracket (2) .]
: Bolt (10)
● Self-sealing bolts (3)
SCIA7210E
ii. Tap adapter case assembly with soft hammer.
SCIA5201E
iii. Remove adapter case assembly from transmission case. (With

needle bearing)
SCIA5186E
iv. Remove gasket from transmission case.
SCIA5231E

DISASSEMBLY
44. Remove bearing race from output shaft.

A
AT
SCIA5245E
D
45. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/
right.
E
G
SCIA5030E
46. Remove parking gear from output shaft. H
SCIA5247E
K
47. Remove seal rings from output shaft.
SCIA5209E
48. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.
SCIA5031E

DISASSEMBLY
49. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.

CAUTION:

edge magnetic area.
SCIA2320E
50. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) using 2 flat-
bladed screwdrivers.
NOTE:
Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap
using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using another
screwdriver.
51. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case.
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.
SCIA5032E
52. Remove N-spring from transmission case.
SCIA5214E
53. Remove reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate
from transmission case.
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary,
replace the plate.
SCIA2322E
54. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) using a flat-bladed

screwdriver.
SCIA2323E

DISASSEMBLY
55. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission

case. A
AT
SCIA2324E
D
56. Remove seal rings from drum support.
G
SCIA3333E
57. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface. H
SCIA2796E K
58. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case with com-
pressed air. Refer to AT-288, "Oil Channel" .
L
CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis-
tons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the pistons. M
SCIA5047E

DISASSEMBLY
59. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston.
SCIA5340E
60. Use a pin punch [4mm (0.16 in) dia. commercial service tool] to
knock out retaining pin.
SCIA2328E
61. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with pair of nippers.
SCIA2329E
62. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft.
SCIA5715E
63. Remove parking rod from manual plate.
SCIA5220E

DISASSEMBLY
64. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.

A
AT
SCIA5716E
D
65. Remove manual shaft oil seals using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transmission case. E
G
SCIA2331E
66. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case. H
SCIA5248E K
67. Using pair of snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from transmis-
sion case.
L
SCIA2333E
68. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission

case.
SCIA5679E

DISASSEMBLY
69. Remove return spring from servo assembly.
SCIA5717E
70. Remove O-rings from servo assembly.
SCIA5719E
71. Remove needle bearing from rear extension (2WD models) or

adapter case (AWD models).
SCIA5221E
72. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension (2WD

models) or adapter case (AWD models).
SCIA3423E
73. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from
rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (AWD models).
SCIA3424E

DISASSEMBLY
74. Remove return spring from parking pawl.

A
● VQ35DE models
AT
D
SCIA2445E
● VK45DE models
– Return spring (1) E
– Parking pawl (2)
SCIA6180J
H
75. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension (2WD models) or
CAUTION: I
Be careful not to scratch rear extension (2WD models) or
J
SCIA5481E

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS PFP:00000
Oil Pump NCS001IQ
COMPONENTS
SCIA5227E

4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover.
SCIA5228E
2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screw-

driver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
SCIA2840E

3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.

A
AT
SCIA2841E
D
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.
G
SCIA5230E
ASSEMBLY H
1. Install O-ring to oil pump cover.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring. I
K
SCIA5230E
2. Install O-ring to oil pump housing. L

CAUTION:

M
SCIA2841E

3. Using the drift, install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump
housing until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pump housing oil seal.
● Apply ATF to oil pump housing oil seal.
SCIA5313E
4. Install oil pump housing to oil pump cover.

5. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order shown in
the figure after temporarily tightening them. Refer to AT-312,
"COMPONENTS" .
SCIA6388E

Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-way Clutch NCS001IR
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA3114E G
1. Front sun gear 2. 3rd one-way clutch 3. Snap ring
DISASSEMBLY
H
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from front sun
gear.
K
SCIA3110E
2. Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear.

L
SCIA3111E

INSPECTION
3rd One-way Clutch
● Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch.
Front Sun Gear Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Front Sun Gear
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front sun gear.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to 3rd one-way clutch.
SCIA3111E
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in front sun

gear.
SCIA3110E
3. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch.

a. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear.
b. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of
3rd one-way clutch.
SCIA3131E

Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear NCS001IS
COMPONENTS A
VQ35DE models
B
AT
SCIA5426E
1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing

4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Snap ring
7. Snap ring 8. Retaining plate 9. Driven plate
10. Input clutch drum 11. Drive plate 12. Rear internal gear

VK45DE models
SCIA7070E
1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing

4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Needle bearing
7. Snap ring 8. Snap ring 9. Retaining plate
10. Driven plate 11. Input clutch drum 12. Drive plate
13. Rear internal gear

DISASSEMBLY
1. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers. A
2. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from
rear internal gear.
3. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly. B
AT
SCIA5339E
D
a. Remove bearing race from front carrier assembly.

E
SCIA2847E
H
b. Remove needle bearing from front carrier assembly. (VK45DE
models)
I
K
SCIA5233E
c. Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly. L

CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
M
SCIA5476E

4. Disassemble input clutch assembly.

a. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly.
SCIA5235E
b. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.
SCIA2853E
c. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from input

clutch drum.
d. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from input
clutch drum.
SCIA2864E
INSPECTION
Front Carrier Snap Ring
CAUTION:
Input Clutch Snap Ring
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drum
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.
CAUTION:
Input Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates

CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. A
Front Carrier
B
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly.
Rear Internal Gear AT
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear internal gear assembly. D
ASSEMBLY
1. Install input clutch.
a. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in input E
clutch drum.
● Snap ring (1)
● Retaining plate (2)

F
● Drive plate (3)
● Driven plate (4)

G
● Drive plate/Driven plate: 7/7
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates. H
SCIA7133E
b. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in input clutch

drum. I
SCIA2864E
L
c. Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. M
SCIA2853E

d. Install O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring and seal rings.
SCIA5235E
2. Install front carrier assembly.

a. Install snap ring to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
SCIA5476E
b. Install needle bearing in front carrier assembly. (VK45DE mod-

els)
CAUTION:
● Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to
AT-291, "Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings" .
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA5233E
c. Install bearing race in front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
d. Install front carrier assembly to input clutch assembly.
SCIA2847E
3. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers.

4. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear
internal gear.
SCIA5339E

Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub NCS001IT
COMPONENTS A
VQ35DE models
B
AT
G
SCIA2851E
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring

4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring H
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring
10. Mid sun gear
I
VK45DE models
SCIA7072E
1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring

4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring
10. Mid sun gear

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing races from high and low reverse clutch hub.
● VQ35DE models
SCIA2854E
● VK45DE models
SCIA5238E
2. Using pair of snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from mid sun
gear assembly.
CAUTION:
SCIA2855E
3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly.
SCIA2856E

a. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.
A
AT
SCIA2857E
D
4. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly.
G
SCIA2858E
a. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from rear sun H

gear.
SCIA2859E K
b. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear.

L
SCIA4633E
5. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.
SCIA2861E

INSPECTION
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring
CAUTION:
1st One-way Clutch
● Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch.
Mid Sun Gear
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the mid sun gear.
Rear Sun Gear
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install seal rings to mid sun gear.
CAUTION:
SCIA2861E
2. Install 1st one-way clutch to rear sun gear.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to 1st one-way clutch.
SCIA4633E

3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring to rear sun

gear. A
AT
SCIA2859E
D
4. Install rear sun gear assembly to mid sun gear assembly.
G
SCIA2858E
5. Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub. H

CAUTION:
● Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to
AT-291, "Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings" . I
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA2857E
K
6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assem-
bly.
L
SCIA2856E
7. Using pair of snap ring pliers, install snap ring to mid sun gear
assembly.
CAUTION:
SCIA2855E

8. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.

a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
b. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of
1st one-way clutch.
SCIA3132E
9. Install needle bearing and bearing races to high and low reverse clutch hub.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and bearing races.
● VQ35DE models
SCIA2854E
● VK45DE models
SCIA5238E

High and Low Reverse Clutch NCS001IU
COMPONENTS A
VQ35DE models
B
AT
G
SCIA5223E
1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race H
VK45DE models
I
SCIA5224E
1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum.
SCIA5215E
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from high and

low reverse clutch drum.
3. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from high
and low reverse clutch drum.
SCIA2868E
INSPECTION
● Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly if necessary.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates
ASSEMBLY
1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in high and low reverse clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Take care with order of plates.
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in high and low
reverse clutch drum.
SCIA2868E

3. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum.

CAUTION: A
AT
SCIA5215E

Direct Clutch NCS001IV
COMPONENTS
VQ35DE models
SCIA7128E
1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate
VK45DE models
SCIA6983E
1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Dish plate

DISASSEMBLY
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from direct A
clutch drum.
2. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plate* from direct clutch drum. B
*: VK45DE models
AT
SCIA2868E
D
INSPECTION
● Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary. E
Direct Clutch Snap Ring

● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. F
Direct Clutch Drive Plates
G
Direct Clutch Retaining Plates, Driven Plates and DIsh Plate*
*: VK45DE models
H
ASSEMBLY
1. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate* in direct clutch drum.
*: VK45DE models I
CAUTION:
● VQ35DE models J
– Snap ring (1)
– Retaining plate (2)
– Drive plate (3) K

– Driven plate (4)
– Drive plate/Driven plate: 5/5

L
SCIA7134E M
● VK45DE models
– Snap ring (1)
– Drive plate (3)
– Dish plate (5)
– Drive plate/Driven plate: 6/6
SCIA6951E

2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in direct clutch

drum.
SCIA2868E

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY PFP:00000
A
Assembly (1) NCS001IW
1. As shown in the figure, use a drift [commercial service tool:

22mm (0.87in) dia.] to drive manual shaft oil seals into the trans- B
mission case until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse manual shaft oil seals.
AT
● Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals.
SCIA5259E
E
2. Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case, and then
tighten detent spring and spacer mounting bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to AT-274, "Components" .
F
H
SCIA5248E
3. Install manual shaft to transmission case.

I
SCIA5716E
L
4. Install parking rod to manual plate.
SCIA5220E

ASSEMBLY
5. Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.
SCIA5715E
6. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse retaining pin.
● Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm (0.08±0.020 in) over the

manual plate.
SCIA5297E
7. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission
case.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse retaining pin.
● Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm (0.20±0.04 in) over the

transmission case.
SCIA2427E
8. Install O-rings to servo assembly.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-rings.
SCIA5719E

ASSEMBLY
9. Install return spring to servo assembly.

A
AT
SCIA5717E
D
10. Install servo assembly in transmission case.
G
SCIA5679E
11. Using pair of snap ring pliers, install snap ring to transmission H
case.
SCIA2333E
K
12. Install D-rings in reverse brake piston.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse D-rings.
L
● Apply ATF to D-rings.
SCIA5340E
13. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case.
SCIA2325E

ASSEMBLY
14. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface.

CAUTION:
SCIA2796E
15. Install seal rings to drum support.

CAUTION:
SCIA3333E
16. Install spring retainer and return spring in transmission case.
SCIA2324E
17. Set the SST on spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing spring
retainer) in transmission case while compressing return spring.
CAUTION:
Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so
that snap ring tension is slightly weak.
SCIA5877E

ASSEMBLY
18. Install reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plates in transmission case.
A
CAUTION:
● VQ35DE models
B
AT
H
SCIA5250E
● VK45DE models
I
– Snap ring (1)
– Drive plate (3) J
– Dish plate (5)
– Drive plate/Driven plate: 6/6 K
SCIA6949E
L

ASSEMBLY
19. Assemble N-spring.

20. Install reverse brake retaining plate in transmission case.
SCIA3179E
21. Install snap ring in transmission case.
SCIA2439E
22. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate. Refer to
“Parts Information” for retaining plate.
Specified clearance “A”
Standard : 0.7 - 1.1mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
SCIA3129E
23. Install needle bearing to transmission case.

CAUTION:
SCIA5031E

ASSEMBLY
24. Install revolution sensor to transmission case, and then tighten

revolution sensor mounting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to A
AT-274, "Components" .
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it. B

edge magnetic area. AT
SCIA2320E
D
25. As shown in the figure, use the drift to drive rear oil seal into the
rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (AWD models)
until it is flush.
E
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse rear oil seal.

F
SCIA5477E
K
26. Install return spring to parking pawl.
● VQ35DE models
L
SCIA2445E

ASSEMBLY
● VK45DE models
– Return spring (1)
– Parking pawl (2)
SCIA6180J
27. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
extension (2WD models) or adapter case (AWD models).
SCIA3424E
28. Install parking actuator support to rear extension (2WD models)

or adapter case (AWD models).
SCIA3423E
29. Install needle bearing to rear extension (2WD models) or

CAUTION:
SCIA5221E
30. Install seal rings to output shaft.

CAUTION:
SCIA5209E

ASSEMBLY
31. Install parking gear to output shaft.

A
AT
SCIA5247E
D
32. Install output shaft in transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides E
looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)
G
SCIA5030E
33. Install bearing race to output shaft. H
SCIA5245E K
34. Install rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (AWD models) according to the
following procedures.
L
a. 2WD models
i. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
ucts and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in M
the figure.
CAUTION:
from the transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.
SCIA5212E

ASSEMBLY
ii. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case.

CAUTION:
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly.
SCIA5029E
iii. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified

torque. Refer to AT-274, "Components" .
CAUTION:
SCIA6941E
b. AWD models
i. Install gasket onto transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse gasket.

from the transmission case and adapter case assembly
mounting surfaces.
SCIA5231E
ii. Install adapter case assembly to transmission case.

CAUTION:
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly.
SCIA5186E

ASSEMBLY
iii. Tighten adapter case assembly mounting bolts (1) to specified

torque. [With bracket (2) .] Refer to AT-274, "Components" . A
: Bolt (10)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolts (3). B
Refer to GI section to mark sure icons (symbol marks) in the fig-
ure. Refer to GI-11, "Components" .
AT
G
SCIA7210E
35. Install needle bearing in drum support.

H
CAUTION:
SCIA5198E
K
36. Install direct clutch assembly in reverse brake.
CAUTION:
Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch L
inner boss edge surface come to almost same place.
SCIA5019E
37. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in direct clutch.
SCIA2306E

ASSEMBLY
38. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, align drive plate.
SCIA3169E
39. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly
and rear sun gear assembly as a unit.
SCIA5018E
CAUTION:
Check that portion “A” of high and low reverse clutch drum
protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion “B”
of rear sun gear.
SCIA3130E
40. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
SCIA2803E

ASSEMBLY
41. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly.

CAUTION: A
AT
SCIA5175E
D
42. Install rear carrier assembly in direct clutch drum.
G
SCIA2462E
43. Install needle bearing (rear side) to mid carrier assembly. H

CAUTION:
I
SCIA2804E
K
44. Install needle bearing (front side) to mid carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. L
SCIA2805E
45. Install mid carrier assembly in rear carrier assembly.
SCIA5017E

ASSEMBLY
46. Install front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear
internal gear as a unit.
SCIA5015E
47. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly.

CAUTION:
SCIA2470E
48. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission
case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse band servo anchor end pin.
SCIA6512E
49. Install brake band in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installa-
tion faces servo side.
SCIA5498E
50. Install front sun gear to front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to front sun gear bearing and 3rd one-way clutch
end bearing.
SCIA5014E

ASSEMBLY
51. Install needle bearing to front sun gear.

A
CAUTION:
AT
SCIA2808E
D
52. Adjust brake band tilting using clips so that brake band contacts
front sun gear drum evenly.
E
G
SCIA5033E
53. Adjust brake band. H

a. Loosen lock nut.
b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to the specified torque.
I
: 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb)
c. Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns.

d. Holding band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to the spec- J
ified torque. Refer to AT-274, "Components" .
SCIA5498E K
Adjustment NCS001IX
TOTAL END PLAY L

● Measure clearance between front sun gear and bearing race for
oil pump cover.
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within M
specifications.
SCIA2810E

ASSEMBLY
1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension

“J”.
SCIA7073E
a. Measure dimension “K”.
SCIA7074E
b. Measure dimension “L”.

c. Calculate dimension “J”.
“J” : Distance between oil pump fitting surface of
transmission case and needle bearing mating
surface of front sun gear.
J=K–L
SCIA5352E
2. Measure dimensions “M1 ” and “M2 ” and then calculate dimen-

sion “M”.
SCIA3125E
a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
SCIA3124E

ASSEMBLY
b. Measure dimension “M1 ”.

A
AT
SCIA3126E
D
c. Measure dimension “M2 ”.
G
SCIA3127E
d. Calculate dimension “M”. H

“M” : Distance between transmission case fitting
surface of oil pump and needle bearing on oil
pump. I
M = M1 – M2
SCIA3125E K
3. Adjust total end play “T1 ”.
T1 = J – M L
Total end play “T1 ”
: 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play M
is within specifications. Refer to “Parts Information” for bear-
ing race selection.
SCIA2810E

ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) NCS001IY
1. Install O-ring to oil pump assembly.

CAUTION:
SCIA5172E
2. Install bearing race to oil pump assembly.

CAUTION:
SCIA6529E
3. Install oil pump assembly in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bearing.
SCIA2811E
4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or

equivalent. Refer to GI-48, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants" .) to oil pump assembly as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
From the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting
bolt mounting surfaces.
SCIA5321E

ASSEMBLY
5. Tighten oil pump mounting bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-

274, "Components" . A
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to oil pump bushing.
B
AT
SCIA2300E
D
6. Install O-ring to input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring. E
G
SCIA5011E
7. Install converter housing to transmission case, and then tighten H

converter housing mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer
to AT-274, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt. I
SCIA3427E
K
8. Make sure that brake band does not close turbine revolution
sensor hole.
L
SCIA5034E
9. Install control valve with TCM.

a. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch con-
nector.
SCIA5449E

ASSEMBLY
b. Install A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with

TCM.
SCIA5450E
c. Connect TCM connectors.
SCIA5447E
d. Install O-ring to A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
SCIA5155E
e. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
SCIA5264E
f. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control

mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-274, "Com-
ponents" .
CAUTION:
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve.
SCIA5301E

ASSEMBLY
g. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.

A
CAUTION:
● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs
turbine revolution sensor hole.
● Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so B
as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM.
● Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve
with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. AT
D
SCIA5034E
● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with E

manual plate projection.
SCIA5035E H
h. Install bolts A, B and C to control valve with TCM.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts I
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
J
C 40 (1.57) 1
SCIA5025E
L
i. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After
that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-274, "Components" . M
SCIA5037E

ASSEMBLY
10. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
SCIA5023E
11. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor 2 harness with terminal clips.
SCIA5446E
SCIA7524E
13. Securely fasten revolution sensor 2 harness with terminal clip.
SCIA7526E
14. Pull down A/T assembly harness connector.

CAUTION:
SCIA5299E

ASSEMBLY
15. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.

A
AT
SCIA5300E
D
16. Install magnets in oil pan.
G
SCIA5200E
17. Install oil pan to transmission case. H

a. Install oil pan gasket to transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. I
● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
b. Install oil pan to transmission case. J

CAUTION:
shown in the figure. K

from oil pan gasket mounting surface. L
SCIA2308E
M

Refer to AT-274, "Components" .
CAUTION:
18. Install drain plug to oil pan, and then tighten drain plug mounting
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-274, "Components" .
CAUTION:
SCIA4113E

ASSEMBLY
19. Install torque converter.

a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
● Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of ATF is
required for a new torque converter.
● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of ATF as was drained.
SAT428DA
b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-

verter with notches of oil pump.
CAUTION:
Install torque converter while rotating it.
SCIA5010E
c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper

position.
Distance “A”
VQ35DE models : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more
VK45DE models : 22.0 mm (0.87 in) or more
SAT017B

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030

A
General Specifications NCS001IZ
VQ35DE engine VK45DE engine

Applied model B
2WD AWD
Automatic transmission model RE5R05A
Transmission model code number 90X4B 91X0C 90X4C 91X0D 95X2B 95X8C
AT
Stall torque ratio 2.0 : 1 1.85 : 1
1st 3.540 3.827
2nd 2.264 2.368 D
Transmission gear 3rd 1.471 1.520
ratio 4th 1.000 1.000
E
5th 0.834 0.834
Reverse 2.370 2.613
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*1 F
Fluid capacity 10.3 liter (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 Imp qt)
CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other ATF. G
● Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will deteriorate in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the
A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
*1: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . H
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs NCS001J0
2WD MODELS
I
Engine model VQ35DE
Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 J
68 - 72 106 - 114 164 - 174 235 - 245 231 - 241 154 - 164 89 - 97 38 - 42
Full throttle
(42 - 45) (66 - 71) (102 - 108) (146 - 152) (144 - 150) (96 - 102) (55 - 60) (23 - 27)
54 - 58 83 - 91 126 - 136 158 - 168 103 - 113 74 - 84 34 - 42 11 - 15 K
Half throttle
(34 - 36) (52 - 57) (78 - 85) (98 - 104) (64 - 70) (46 - 52) (21 - 26) (7 - 9)
L
AWD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) M
Throttle position
62 - 66 96 - 104 149 - 159 213 - 223 209 - 219 121 - 131 81 - 89 39 - 43
Full throttle
(39 - 41) (60 - 65) (93 - 99) (132 - 139) (130 - 136) (75 - 81) (50 - 55) (24 - 27)
49 - 53 75 - 83 114 - 124 141 - 151 94 - 104 66 - 76 31 - 39 11 - 15
Half throttle
(30 - 33) (47 - 52) (71 - 77) (88 - 94) (58 - 65) (41 - 47) (19 - 24) (7 - 9)
Engine model VK45DE

Throttle position
59 - 63 95 - 103 147 - 157 219 - 229 215 - 225 130 - 140 82 - 90 35 - 39
Full throttle
(37 - 39) (59 - 64) (92 - 98) (137 - 143) (134 - 141) (81 - 88) (51 - 56) (22 - 24)
48 - 52 77 - 85 121 - 131 153 - 163 121 - 131 67 - 77 39 - 47 9 - 13
Half throttle
(30 - 33) (48 - 53) (76 - 82) (96 - 102) (76 - 82) (42 - 48) (24 - 29) (6 - 8)

Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases NCS001J1
2WD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Throttle position
Closed throttle 63 - 73 (39 - 45) 40 - 48 (25 - 30)
Half throttle 196 - 204 (122 - 127) 153 - 161 (95 - 100)
AWD MODELS
Engine model VQ35DE
Throttle position
Closed throttle 59 - 67 (37 - 42) 56 - 64 (35 - 40)
Half throttle 178 - 186 (111 - 116) 139 - 147 (86 - 91)
Engine model VK45DE

Throttle position
Closed throttle 66 - 74 (41 - 46) 53 - 61 (33 - 38)
Half throttle 191 - 199 (119 - 124) 147 - 155 (92 - 97)
Stall Speed NCS001J2
Engine model VQ35DE VK45DE

Stall speed 2,650 - 2,950 rpm 2,260 - 2,560 rpm
Line Pressure NCS001J3
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)

Engine speed
R position D and M positions
At idle speed 425 - 465 (4.3 - 4.7, 62 - 67) 379 - 428 (3.9 - 4.4, 55 - 62)
At stall speed 1,605 - 1,950 (16.4 - 19.9, 233 - 283) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.4 - 15.3, 190 - 218)
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor NCS001J4
Name Condition CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) Resistance (Approx.)

0°C (32°F) 3.3 V 15 kΩ
A/T fluid temperature sensor 1 20°C (68°F) 2.7 V 6.5 kΩ
80°C (176°F) 0.9 V 0.9 kΩ
0°C (32°F) 3.3 V 10 kΩ
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 20°C (68°F) 2.5 V 4 kΩ
80°C (176°F) 0.7 V 0.5 kΩ

Turbine Revolution Sensor NCS001J5
A
Name Condition Data (Approx.)
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed with the closed throttle
Turbine revolution sensor 1
position signal OFF.
1.3 kHz B
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st speed with the closed throttle
Turbine revolution sensor 2
position signal OFF.
Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) NCS001J6

AT
Name Condition Data (Approx.)

Revolution sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH). 185 Hz D
Reverse Brake NCS001J7
Model code number 90X4B, 90X4C 95X2B E

Number of drive plates 6
Number of driven plates 6
Clearance mm (in) Standard 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043) F
Total End Play NCS001J8
Total end play mm (in) 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)

G


Infiniti FX AT Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Infiniti FX AT Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Infiniti FX AT Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Revision: 2006 December AT-1 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December AT-2 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December AT-3 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December AT-4 2006 FX35/FX45

INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

Revision: 2006 December AT-5 2006 FX35/FX45

DTC No. Index NCS001AM

P0744(*2) P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-127

P1754(*2) P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-148

P1759(*2) P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-152

P1764(*2) P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-156

P1774(*2) P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-164

Revision: 2006 December AT-6 2006 FX35/FX45

Revision: 2006 December AT-7 2006 FX35/FX45

● Before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly har-

● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

Revision: 2006 December AT-8 2006 FX35/FX45

Service Notice or Precautions NCS001AQ

ATF COOLER SERVICE A

Revision: 2006 December AT-9 2006 FX35/FX45

Special Service Tools NCS001AR

ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

ST33400001 ● Installing rear oil seal (2WD models)

KV31102400 Installing reverse brake return spring retainer

ST25850000 Removing oil pump assembly

Revision: 2006 December AT-10 2006 FX35/FX45

Commercial Service Tools NCS001AS

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

Drift Installing manual shaft oil seals D

Revision: 2006 December AT-11 2006 FX35/FX45

A/T FLUID PFP:KLE40

Changing A/T Fluid NCS001AT

ATF: Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF

● Do not reuse drain plug gasket.

5. Run engine at idle speed for 5 minutes.

Revision: 2006 December AT-12 2006 FX35/FX45

Checking A/T Fluid NCS001AU

a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.

Revision: 2006 December AT-13 2006 FX35/FX45

VK45DE) and AT-15, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" .

Revision: 2006 December AT-14 2006 FX35/FX45

A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning NCS001AV

● Do not breath vapors or spray mist. K

Revision: 2006 December AT-15 2006 FX35/FX45

A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE

● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.

Revision: 2006 December AT-16 2006 FX35/FX45

A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE

b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm

A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION H

Revision: 2006 December AT-17 2006 FX35/FX45

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:31036

Cross-sectional View (2WD Models) NCS001AW

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

Revision: 2006 December AT-18 2006 FX35/FX45

Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD) NCS001AX

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear

Revision: 2006 December AT-19 2006 FX35/FX45

Closed throttle position signal(5) X (2) X X X X (*4)

Wide open throttle position signal(5) X X (4) G

Stop lamp switch signal(5) X X X X (4) I